Home

BMW 550i Owner's Manual

1. GF CD DVD amp Storing Best off xt Vs e Brothers in arms amp Mezzanine Audio CD Reload amp Beautiful 4 Cancel storing The storage process is interrupted and can be continued at any time Continuing the storage process 1 CD Multimedia 2 CD DVD 3 Select the symbol for the CD DVD player 4 Continue storing Storage of the CD DVD continues at the begin ning of the track at which storage was inter rupted Album information During storage information such as the name of the artist is stored with the track if this informa tion is available in the vehicle database or on the CD To update the database contact your service center 188 l Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 from a USB device 3 Music search To store music a suitable device must be con nected to the USB interface in the glove com partment GF Music collection Q Music search Current playback gt Suitable devices USB mass storage devi Bese Top 50 ces suchas USB flash drives or MP3 players i Audio CD 1 with a USB interface v Frank gt Unsuitable devices USB hard discs USB USB 1 hubs USB memory card readers with mul LIEBLINGSSONGS tiple inserts Apple iPod iPhone Music from l the Apple iPod iPhone can be played via the USB audio interface in the center armrest 1 Connect the USB device to the USB inter face in the glove compart
2. 4 Turn the controller Enter the desired num ber of miles 5 Press the controller Resuming the original route If the route section should no longer be by passed 1 Navigation 2 Route information 3 Remove blocking Gas station recommendation The remaining range is calculated and gas sta tions along the route are recommended 1 Navigation 163 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f 2 Route information 3 Recommended refuel A list of the gas stations is displayed 4 Highlight a gas station With the Professional navigation system The position of the gas station is shown on the split screen 5 Select the gas station Select the symbol 7 Start guidance or Add as another dest Switching spoken instructions on off The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use 1 Navigation 2 Map 3 WY Select the symbol cy Spoken instructions are switched on 4 Spoken instructions are switched off Repeating spoken instructions 1 Navigation 2 Map 3 Highlight the symbol 4 Press the controller twice Volume of spoken instructions Turn the volume button while giving an instruc tion until the desired volume is set Saving the spoken instructions on the programmable memory buttons The function for switching the spoken instruc tions on off can be stored on a programmable memory button refer to page 23 for quick ac
3. O A pa O q Cc O LLI ab T O Online Editio Cockpit All around the steering wheel Seating comfort functions Seat mirror steering wheel mem ory 57 A Active seat 50 Roller sunblinds 45 Safety switch for the rear windows and roller sunblinds 45 Power windows 44 Exterior mirror operation 58 Driver assistance systems Active Blind Spot Detec AA tion 98 y Collision warning 112 2 Lane departure warning 97 sia 4 4 12 Night Vision with pedestrian de tection 123 Head up Display 126 z D re a Front fog lamps 89 Parking lamps 86 Low beams 86 Loe Aiko U Q Automatic headlamp con trol 87 Daytime running lights 87 High beam Assistant 88 Hs Instrument lighting 89 J WN G Ti Steering column stalk left Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 SRO SN U or D D Ke D D o E or or O S a Oi on m m N D Turn signal 70 High beams head lamp flasher 70 High beam Assistant 88 Roadside parking lamps 87 Computer 78 9P h mr 7 Store speed 114 108 Resume speed 115 109 Cruise control on off inter rupt 114 107 Increase distance 109 Decrease distance 108 10 Instrument cluster 14 11 Steering wheel buttons right IHE m Entertainment source Volume ug N Voice activation 25 T
4. 156 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Last destinations Ata glance The destinations previously entered are stored automatically The destinations can be called up and used as a destination for destination guidance Calling up the last destination 1 Navigation 2 Last destinations NN EMEL Zieleingabe Adressbuch Letzte Ziele Sonderziele Karte Gespeicherte Reisen Routenverlauf 3 Select the destination 4 Start destination guidance Editing the destination 1 Navigation 2 Last destinations 3 Highlight the destination 4 Open Options 5 Edit destination Deleting the last destinations 1 Navigation Last destinations Highlight the destination Open Options oe Delete entry or Delete all last destinations 157 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 i Special destinations Opening the search for special destinations To select special destinations e g hotels or tourist attractions 1 Navigation 2 Points of Interest Narrow the search for special destinations by specifying the location and category Position of special destinations 1 Search area Ii GE Points of Interest we Search area At destination Across all categories Several category details Start search Name A Z search 2 Select the location where the system is to search for the special destination At current location A
5. Brightness AOUN gt Navigation Turn the controller The brightness is adjusted When the low beams are switched on the basic setting can be made using the instrument light ing refer to page 89 The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Entertainment Adjusting the height 1 Settings 2 Head up display 3 Height 4 Turn the controller The height is adjusted The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Communication Mobility Special windshield The windshield is part of the system The shape of the windshield makes it possible to display a precise image v O O a O aa 127 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f Climate control Climate control Automatic climate control Air distribution left side Temperature left side AUTO program left side A WON Of Air volume AUTO intensity residual heat left side Remove ice and condensation Maximum cooling Display Air volume AUTO intensity right side AUTO program right side ON OO Ol O Temperature right side Climate control functions in detail Manual air distribution EA Press the button repeatedly to select a r 488 program 41 gt Upper body region gt Upper body region and footwell 128 11 Air distribution right side 12 Seat heating right side 50 13 Active seat ventilation right side 51 14 Auto
6. Coolant General information Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while the engine is hot otherwise escaping coolant may cause burns lt Suitable additives Only use suitable additives otherwise en gine damage may occur The additives are harmful to your health lt Coolant consists of water and additives Not all commercially available additives are suit able for your vehicle Ask your service center for suitable additives Coolant level Have your service center check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary Disposal CRY Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant additives 23 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 gt ire Maintenance Maintenance BMW Maintenance System y IW The system obtains information 4 about the road safety and opera tional reliability of the vehicle and takes into account aspects such as atimely vehicle check Theaim is to optimize maintenance pro cedures with a view to reducing the cost of run ning the vehicle Ai Service in 5600 mis 12 2009 Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take into ac count the driving conditions of your vehicle Based on this Condition Based Service deter mines the maintenance requirements The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance you need to your
7. In the Owner s Manual menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks e g Settings Changing between panels After a menu item is selected e g Radio a new panel is displayed Panels can overlap gt Move the controller to the left The current panel is closed and the previous panel is displayed The previous panel is opened again by pressing the BACK button In this case the current panel is not closed gt Move the controller to the right Anew panelis opened on top of the previous display Q Manual CARIVARI ENERGY GONG96 3 KLASSIK 100 0 MHz 101 3 MHz Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate that additional panels can be opened View of an opened menu When a menu is opened it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu To display the first panel of a menu gt Move the controller to the left repeatedly until the first panel is displayed gt Press the menu button on the controller twice Opening the Options menu Press the button AG Options LY Split screen FM Display Owner s Manual O HD Radio Reception O RDS Radio Additional options move the controller to the right repeatedly until the Options menu is dis played Options menu The Options menu consists of various areas gt Screen settings for instance Split screen This area remains unchange
8. O O From behind when driving at night turn the knob Interior rearview mirror automatic dimming feature Photocells are used for control gt Inthe mirror glass gt On the back of the mirror For proper operation gt Keep the photocells clean gt Donotcover the area between the inside rearview mirror and the windshield Steering wheel General information Adjusting while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving otherwise an unexpected movement could result in an accident lt 59 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Adjusting Manual steering wheel adjustment Ney N 1 Fold the lever down 2 Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating posi tion 3 Fold the lever back Power steering wheel adjustment The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di rections Storing the position Seat mirror and steering wheel memory refer to page 57 Steering wheel heating Switching on off ry Press the button gt On the LED lights up gt Off the LED goes out 60 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Transporting children safely The right place for children Note Children in the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle otherwise they could endanger them selves and other persons e g by opening the doors lt Children should always be in th
9. Useful short commands Function Owner s Manual Opening the music collection Opening the tone settings Opening the settings Opening the profiles Opening the computer Opening the contacts Displaying the phone book Opening BMW Assist Opening the destination input CD multimedia CD DVD drive Function Playing back a CD Selecting a CD Selecting a CD and track Selecting a track Opening the CD and multimedia menu Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Command gt Owner s Manual Music collection lt Tonex Settings Profiles Onboard info lt gt Contacts Phonebook gt B M W Assist Enter address Command C Don gt Select C D gt C D track lt e g CD 3 track 5 gt C D track lt e g track 5 gt C D and multimedia 259 S eb S Ge 0 ad Short commands for voice activation system CD and DVD gt C Dk Displaying entertainment details on the split screen Entertainment details Music collection Calling up the current playback gt Current playback Opening the music collection Music collection Playing the music collection Music collection on Searching for music opening the menu gt Music search Playing back the most frequently played tracks gt Top fifty External devices Opening external devices External devices Call up Bluetooth devices Bluetooth AUX front AUX front Tone Open
10. Setting multi channel playback surround 1 CD Multimedia Radio or Settings 2 Tone 3 Surround 1 Tone Treble Bass Balance Fader Equalizer EY Surround Volume settings Multi channel playback surround is simulated when playing back an audio track in stereo 172 l Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Multi channel playback is automatically acti vated or deactivated depending on the audio track selected Volume gt Speed volume soeed dependent volume control gt PDC volume of the PDC signal compared to the entertainment sound output gt Gong volume of the signal such as the safety belt reminder compared to the en tertainment sound output Adjusting the volume 1 CD Multimedia Radio or Settings 2 Tone 3 Volume settings 4 Select the desired volume setting 45 Volume settings Speed volume Volume setting PDC Gong 5 To adjust turn the controller 6 To store press the controller Resetting the tone settings 1 CD Multimedia Radio or Settings 2 Tone 3 Reset 173 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f At a glance Controls Driving tips NEEL OIA a ed tee ed LLI Communication Mobility Reference Radio Controls LEN was Dh zoz 1 Change entertainment sources 2 Change station track 3 Programmable m
11. The body ground or a special nut acts as the negative terminal Connecting the cables 1 Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter minal 2 Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance 3 Attach the other end of the cable to the pos itive terminal of the battery or to the corre sponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started 4 Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle providing assis tance 5 Attach the other end of the cable to the neg ative terminal of the battery or to the corre sponding engine or body ground of the ve hicle to be started Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine 1 Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed 2 Startthe engine of the other vehicle as usual If the first starting attempt is not successful wait a few minutes before making another attempt in order to allow the discharged bat tery to recharge 3 Let both engines run for several minutes 4 Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse order Check the battery and recharge if necessary Tow starting and towing Tow fitting The screw in tow fitting should always
12. gt Engine oil level too high Have this checked Have the vehicle checked immediately Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immedi ately otherwise surplus oil can lead to en gine damage gt Measurement inactive Have this checked Note the newly calculated remaining mile age until the next oil service Have the sys tem checked as soon as possible Adding engine oil Filler neck When the indicator lights up in the instrument cluster add 1 US quart liter of engine oil within the next 125 miles 200 km Recommended oil types refer to page 236 Protect children Keep oil grease etc out of reach of chil dren and heed the warnings on the containers to prevent health risks Oil types Note No oil additives Oil additives may lead to engine dam age lt 236 i Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Approved oil types Your service center can advise you on which en gine oils have been approved by the manufac turer of your vehicle The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine Only use approved BMW High Performance oil Approved oils belong to the following viscosity classes SAE OW 40 SAE OW 30 SAE 5W 40 and SAE 5W 30 Alternative oil types If the approved engine oils are not available up to 1 US quart liter of another oil with the follow ing specification may be used API SM specifications or higher BMW recommends Castrol
13. 2 New contact a 7 Wr Contacts 4 7 i i New contact i i My contacts E a b O a a 3 The entry fields are still filled with the previ ous entries Delete input fields 4 Fillin the entry fields select the symbol next to the entry field L A EF New contact wh Delete input fields Store contact in vehicle 3 Last name First name g Home E Business E Mobile 5 Enter the text refer to page 24 6 When equipped with a navigation system Enter the address Only addresses con tained in the navigation data in the vehicle can be entered This ensures that destina tion guidance is possible for all addresses 7 If necessary Store 8 Store contact in vehicle Specifying a contact as the home address A contact can be stored as the home address It is placed at the top of My contacts 1 Home 2 Create acontact My contacts General information A list of all contacts in the vehicle and mobile phone Displaying contacts 1 Contacts 2 My contacts amp Contacts Wi E F E Mew contact My contacts All contacts are listed in alphabetical order An A Z search is offered refer to page 24 if there are 30 or more contacts lt Q G Ly A 5 E O O A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts 213 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Contacts Symbol Storage location No sym
14. Date update refer to page 80 gt Radio station Save again refer to page 174 gt Navigation system wait for the operability of the navigation Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or take them to a recy cling center Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport Fuses Notes Replacing fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating this could lead to a circuit overload ultimately resulting in a fire in the vehicle Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse types and locations are stored in the fuse box in the trunk In the glove compartment Push the handle up arrow 1 and open the lid arrow 2 In the trunk Open the cover on the right side trim Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet 245 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 i At a glance Controls Driving tips Navigation p eb z cc id LLI Communication Mobility Reference Breakdown assistance Breakdown assistance Hazard warning flashers The button for the hazard warning flashers is lo cated in the center console Emergency Request Require
15. Deactivate TeleService 220 i Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 uejp e y s 01 Uu09 sd Bulang uonebinen JUOWIUIeoIUS UOI eEDIUNWIWOD 221 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f Refueling Fuel cap Opening 1 Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap 3 Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket at tached to the fuel filler flap Closing Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click yn Do not pinch the retaining strap 224 Do not pinch the retaining strap attached to the cap otherwise the cap cannot be closed prop erly and fuel vapors can escape A message is displayed if the cap is loose or missing Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of an electrical malfunction for ex ample 1 Open the cover on the right side trim 2 Pullthe green knob with the fuel pump sym bol This releases the fuel filler flap Observe the following when refueling The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time Handling fuels Obey safety regulations posted at the gas station Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Fuel tank capacity Fuel tank capacity approx 18 5 US gal 70 liters Refuel promptly At a glance Refuel below a range of 30 miles 50 km otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage may occur lt 2
16. If speed limit detection is switched on it can be displayed on the info display in the instrument cluster via the computer Display The following is displayed in the instrument cluster gt Current speed limit e a gt No speed limit for the Ger man autobahn gt Speed limit detection is not available Information regarding speed limit detection can also be displayed in the Head up Display refer to page 126 System limits The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the following situations gt In heavy fog rain or snowfall gt When signs are concealed by objects gt When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you gt When driving toward bright lights 84 f Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 gt When the windshield is fogged over dirty or covered by a sticker etc in front of the in terior rearview mirror gt In areas not covered by the navigation sys tem gt When roads differ from the navigation e g due to changes in the road network gt When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker Camera Sw IY ammo The camera is located on the front of the interior rearview mirror Keep the area in front of the interior rearview mirror clear 85 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f At a glance Controls Driving tips Navigation J eb cc J G LL
17. Opening the tailgate Press the button on the remote control for approx 1 second The small tailgate opens slightly The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens Ensure that adequate clearance is available be fore opening With automatic trunk lid operation Press the button on the remote control for approx 1 second and release gt The large tailgate opens automatically Note the opening height of the large tail gate The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when the large tailgate opens otherwise damage may result The tailgate opens regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle do not place the remote control into the trunk The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is pushed closed FN Provide edge protection Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear window while driving and damage the heating wires of the rear window Provide edge protection lt Confirmation signals from the vehicle 1 Settings 2 Door locks 3 Deactivate or activate the desired confirma tion signals gt Acoustic sig lock unlock gt Flash when lock unlock s Door locks Unlock button All doors O Last seat position auto Lock if no door is opened b 4 Lock after start to drive Acoustic sig lock unlock i Flash when
18. Settings 2 Lighting 3 Pathway light s oF Lighting Pathway light Os O Triple turn signal DO Daytime running lamps gt O Welcome light 86 i Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 4 Set the duration The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Automatic headlamp control Switch position 20 the low beams are switched on and off automatically e g in tunnels in twi light or if there is precipitation The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on The low beams always stay on when the fog lamps are switched on Personal responsibility The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as asubstitute for your personal judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions For example the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather To avoid safety risks you should always switch on the lamps manually un der these conditions Daytime running lights The daytime running lights light up in posi tion 0 DQ and 40 After the ignition is switched off the parking lamps light up in posi tion DQE Activating deactivating 1 Settings 2 Lighting 3 Daytime running lamps oF Lighting Pathway light WES O Triple turn signal O Daytime running lamps ot OF Welcome light 87 Online E
19. Start function during malfunc tion 33 Starting aid 247 Starting the engine 65 State province selecting for navigation 154 Stations stored 180 Station storing 174 Status display tires 93 Status information iDrive 22 Status of Owner s Manual 6 Steering Integral Active Steering 102 Steering wheel adjusting 59 Steering wheel heating 60 Steering wheel memory 57 Steptronic automatic trans mission 72 Stopping the engine 66 Storage compartment in the center console 142 Storage compartments 140 Storage compartments loca tions 140 Storage tires 232 Storing the vehicle 253 Street entering for naviga tion 155 Summer tires tread 230 Surround View 118 Suspension settings 103 Switch for Dynamic Driving Control 103 Switch on times parked car ventilation 133 Switch refer to Cockpit 12 Symbols 6 T Tachometer 76 Tail and brake lamps 242 Tailgate 38 Tailgate automatic 39 Tailgate emergency unlock ing 41 Tailgate hotel function 41 Tailgate via remote control 36 Tail lamps 242 Tail lamps bulb replace ment 242 Technical changes refer to Safety 6 Technical data 256 Telephone 204 TeleService 217 Temperature automatic cli mate control 129 Temperature display external temperature 75 Temperature engine oil 76 Terminal 0 65 Terminal 15 65 Terminal R 65 Terminal starting aid 247 Theft alarm system refer to Alarm system 42 Theft protection lug bolts 244
20. The distance that the vehicle maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be varied For safety reasons it depends on the speed To maintain a certain distance the system au tomatically decelerates applies the brakes lightly or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead begins moving faster If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt the system is able to detect this within the given system limits If the vehicle ahead of your drives away again from a halt your vehicle is able to accelerate if operated accordingly Even if some time passes before the vehicle drives away again the BMW can still be accel erated automatically and simply As soonas the road is clear it accelerates to the desired speed The speed is also maintained on downhill gra dients but may not be maintained on uphill slopes if engine power is insufficient Buttons at a glance 3 4 me gt A a a O m J O O System on off interrupt Resume speed Store speed Increase distance Store maintain change speed ort WAN Reduce distance Switching on off and interrupting cruise control Switching on ETE Press the button on the steering wheel The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up and the marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed Cruise control can be used When the speed limit is switched on DSC Dy namic Stability Control refer to page 101 is switched on as well if necessary
21. ing may result in serious accidents 2 Repair the puncture 96 Continued driving with a flat tire Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure gt With alight load 1 to 2 people without lug gage approx 90 miles 150 km gt With a medium load 2 people trunk full or 4 people without luggage approx 50 miles 80 km gt With a full load 4 people trunk full approx 30 miles 50 km If there is minor tire damage especially on the tire tread the distance that you can travel with the damaged tire can be extended After notification inflate the damaged tire to a maximum of 3 5 bar at the next opportunity Do not reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor The ex isting flat tire notification will continue to act as a reminder of the defective tire The procedure can be repeated several times Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics e g re duced lane stability during braking a longer braking distance and altered self steering prop erties lt Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of the tire Reduce speed and stop otherwise pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident Do not con tinue driving and contact your service center lt Status display The current s
22. 1 Settings 2 Climate 3 Activate Timer 1 or Activate Timer 2 EY The activation time is activated amp The symbol on the automatic climate control lights up S The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes when the system has been switched on The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours After that it needs to reactivated v O c 2 O Cd q Controls Driving tips Navigation Communication Entertainment v 0 i g O as t ior equipmen Inter Interior equipment Integrated universal remote control The concept This system can replace up to three different hand held transmitters for various types of re mote controlled equipment such as garage doors or lighting systems The hand held transmitter signal can be pro grammed on one of the three memory buttons The corresponding device can then be operated using the programmed memory button The LED indicates that a signal is being trans mitted When selling the vehicle delete the stored pro grams for security reasons During programming During programming and before activat ing a device using the universal remote control ensure that there are no people animals or ob jects in the range of movement of the remote controlled device otherwise there is a risk of injury or damage Also follow the safety instructions of the hand held transmitter Compatibility I
23. 3 Select the required seat lt Seat heating Driver Passenger i 4 Turn the controller to set the temperature distribution Active seat ventilation The seat surface is cooled by means of the in tegrated fan The ventilation rapidly cools the seat e g if the vehicle interior is overheated or for continuous cooling at high temperatures a Press the button once for each ventila e tion level The highest level is active when three LEDs are lit After a short time the system automatically moves down one level in order to prevent ex cessive cooling Press the button longer 5 The LEDs go out E Rear seats Adjusting gt 1 Forward backward 2 Backrest diustments in det ustable seats Do not adjust the seat while driving Never attempt to adjust the seat while driving Otherwise the restraining effect of the seat can be limited in an accident lt Forward back 51 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired Adjustments in detail power seats direction 1 Forward back After releasing the level move the seat forward or back slightly until it engages 2 Backrest tilt Backrest tilt Pull the lever and apply your weight to the back rest or lift it off 3 Head restraint 1 Forward backward 2 Shoulder support 3 Backrest head restraint The seats cannot be adjusted
24. Close the glove compartment again im mediately 140 Close the glove compartment immediately after use while driving otherwise injury may occur during accidents lt Closing Fold up the cover USB interface for data transfer Connection for importing and exporting data on USB devices e g gt Personal Profile settings refer to page 33 gt Music collection refer to page 187 Observe the following when connecting gt Donot use force when plugging the con nector into the USB interface gt Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB interface gt Do not connect USB hard drives Do not use the USB interface to recharge external devices Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Driver s side Locking the storage compartment C 2 pes Jad e S The storage compartment in the armrest can be locked with a key to separately secure the tail Pull the handle gate refer to page 41 for example FN Close the glove compartment again im After the storage compartment is locked the re mediately mote control can be handed out without the in Close the glove compartment immediately after tegrated key refer to page 32 for instance at a use while driving otherwise injury may occur hotel during accidents lt This prevents access to the storage compart ment and to the trunk Fold up the cover Center armrest Front A storage compartment is located i
25. Ignition key refer to Remote control 32 Ignition off 65 Ignition on 65 Indication of a flat tire 93 96 Indicator and warning mes sages 14 Indicator lamps 14 Individual air distribution 128 Individual settings refer to Personal Profile 33 Inflation pressure monitor tires 92 Inflation pressure tires 227 269 oO Oo oO ra oO C oO aa Everything from A to Z Inflation pressure warning tires 95 Info display 75 Information on navigation data 167 Initialization Integral Active Steering 102 Initializing Flat Tire Monitor FTM 95 Initializing Tire Pressure Mon itor TPM 93 Instrument cluster 14 75 Instrument cluster electronic displays 16 Instrument lighting 89 Integral Active Steering 102 Integrated key 32 Integrated universal remote control 134 Intensity AUTO program 129 Interactive map 159 Interior equipment 134 Interior lamps 89 Interior lamps via remote con trol 36 Interior motion sensor 43 Interior rearview and exterior mirrors automatic dimming feature 59 Interior rearview mirror 59 Intermediate destina tions 160 Internet page 6 Intersection entering for navi gation 155 Interval display service re quirements 82 iPod iPhone 193 J Jacking points for the vehicle jack 244 Jack refer to Vehicle jack 244 Joystick automatic transmis sion 73 270 K Key remote control 32 Keyless Go refer to Comfort Access 41 Key Memory refer to Perso
26. Passenger side mirror tilting downward 59 Pathway lines backup cam era 120 PDC Park Distance Con trol 115 Pedestrian detection refer to Night Vision 123 People detection refer to Night Vision 123 Permissible axle load 258 Personal Profile 33 271 oO Oo oO ra oO C oO aa Everything from A to Z Pinch protection system glass sunroof 46 Pinch protection system win dows 44 Plastic care 253 Position storing 156 Postal code entering in navi gation 155 Power failure 244 Power output engine 257 Power windows 44 Pressure monitor tires 92 Pressure tire air pres sure 227 Pressure warning tires 95 Profile refer to Personal Pro file 33 Programmable memory but tons iDrive 23 Protective function glass sun roof 46 Protective function win dows 44 Push and turn switch refer to Controller 19 R Radiator fluid 237 Radio 174 Radio operated key refer to Remote control 32 Radio ready state 65 Rain sensor 71 Random 182 Random playback 182 RDS 175 Rear automatic climate con trol 132 Rear axle steering 102 Rear entertainment 196 Rear fog lamp bulb replace ment 243 Rear lamps 242 Rear seats adjusting 51 Rear seats basic position 53 Rear sockets 137 Rearview mirror 58 272 Rear window defroster 130 Recirculated air mode 129 Recommended tire brands 231 Refueling 224 Release tool 240 Remaining range 77 Remote control key 32 Remote cont
27. R 275 40R19101Y 24135 gt F 245 40R2099Y 2 4135 k XL 3 26 38 R 275 35 R 20 102 Y XL 227 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Wheels and tires Tire size Pressure specifica tions in psi kPa FZ 2 6 38 245 35 R2196 YXL _ 30 44 R 275 30 R 21 98 Y XL 245 50 R 18 100 Y 245 50 R 18 100 V M S A S 245 50 R 18 100 H M S 245 45 R 19 102 V M S XL 2 2132 2 4 35 2 4 35 26 38 Tire inflation pressures at max speeds above 100 mph 160 km h Speeds above 100 mph 160 km h In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex cess of 100 mph 160 km h please observe and if necessary adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph 160 km h from the relevant table on the following pages Otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph 160 km h With partial load Tire size Pressure specifica tions in psi kPa mx kiki Specifications in psi kilopascal with cold tires ea P E F 245 45R1998Y 2 21 32 R 275 40R19 101Y 24135 F 245 40R2099Y 2 4135 XL 2 6138 R 275 35 R 20 102 Y XL 228 Tire size eee 245 35 R 21 96 Y XL R 275 30 R 21 98 Y XL 245 50 R 18 100 Y 245 50 R 18 100 V M S A S 245 50 R 18 100 H M S 245 45 R 19 102 V M S XL With full load Tire size Specifications in psi kilopascal with cold tires F 245 45 R 19 98 Y R 275 40 R 19 101 Y F 245 40 R 20 99 Y XL
28. S a e2 a x Driving tips Navigation Communication Entertainment v 3 d 2 O a Rear entertainment Infrared headphones Connection via the infrared interface on the lower edge of the screen Fitting infrared headphones and information on which headphones are supported can be ob tained from your service center When using infrared headphones ensure that the connection between the headphones and the infrared interface is not disrupted gt Donot place an obstacle between the inter face and headphones gt Donot cover the interface gt Do not scratch the interface Fold up display screens for interference free re ception Unfavorable light conditions such as bright am bient light can impair reception Sound output on the headphones or vehicle loudspeakers Operation is only possible in the rear 1 Open Options 2 Headphones or Loudspeakers With the following setting sound output in the rear is not possible via the vehicle speakers Driver control External devices General information External audio and video devices and digital cameras can be connected to cinch sockets re fer to page 196 on the CD DVD player Opera tion takes place on the external device Due to the large number of different audio and video devices available on the market it cannot be ensured that every audio and video device will be displayed correctly on the screen Conne
29. Settings 2 Control display XS Settings Info display Control display Time Date Language Units Tone Speed Climate At a glance Ly e Le p e O Driving tips NEEL OIA Communication Entertainment Mobility oO o Pe oO Tajemn o aa tability control systems Ivings Dr 3 Display driving settings amp Control display Brightness e EY Display driving settings q Drive off assistant This system supports driving away on gradients The parking brake is not required 1 Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake 2 Release the foot brake and drive away with out delay After the foot brake is released the vehicle is held in place for approx 2 seconds Depending on the vehicle load the vehicle may roll back slightly Driving off without delay After releasing the foot brake start driving without delay since the drive off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than ap prox 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling back 106 i Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Driving comfort Active Cruise Control with Stop amp Go function ACC The concept This system can be used to select a desired speed that the vehicle will maintain automati cally on clear roads Tothe extent possible the system automatically adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of you
30. Switching off Deactivated or interrupted system If the system is deactivated or interrupted actively intervene by braking and if necessary with evasive maneuvers otherwise there is the danger of an accident occurring lt If switching off the system while stationary press on the brake pedal at the same time 107 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Driving comfort Press the button gt If active press twice gt If interrupted press once The displays go out The stored desired speed and distance are deleted Interrupting When active press the button If interrupting the system while stationary press on the brake pedal at the same time The system is automatically interrupted if gt The brakes are applied gt Transmission position D is disengaged gt DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated DSC is actively controlling stability gt The safety belt and the driver s door are opened when the vehicle is standing gt The system has not detected objects for an extended period e g on aroad with very lit tle traffic without road edge line markings gt The radar sensor is dirty Maintaining storing the speed Press the button When the system is switched on the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly displayed in the instrument cluster Displays in the instrument
31. The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if a door is not opened gt Lock after start to drive The vehicle locks automatically after you drive away amp Doorlocks si I Door locks Unlock button All doors O Last seat position auto Lock if no door is opened Lock after start to drive Acoustic sig lock unlock Flash when lock unlock Doors Automatic Soft Closing To close the doors push lightly It is closed automatically Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the doors is clear otherwise injuries may result Tailgate Opening Opening the small tailgate The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens Ensure that adequate clearance is available be fore opening 38 l Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 gt Press the button on the tailgate arrow 1 gt Press the button on the remote control for approx 1 second gt Push the button in the driver s foot well The tailgate is opened if the vehicle is sta tionary provided that the tailgate has not been locked Provide edge protection Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear window while driving and damage the heating wires of the rear window Provide edge protec tion lt Opening the large tailgate Note the opening height of the large tail gate The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when the large tailgate opens ot
32. automatic control of the air volume and air distribution can be adjusted m r Press the left or right side of the button decrease or increase the intensity The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control Air volume manual To be able to manually adjust the air volume switch off the AUTO program first ry Press the left or right side of the button decrease or increase air volume The selected air volume is shown on the display of the automatic climate control Defrosting windows and removing condensation Press the button Ice and condensation are quickly re moved from the windshield and the front side windows The air volume can be adjusted when the pro gram is active Maximum cooling Press the button MAX The system is set to the lowest tem perature maximum air volume and recirculated air mode Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re gion Open them for this purpose Air is cooled as quickly as possible gt Atan external temperature of approx 32 F 0 C gt When the engine is running The air volume can be adjusted when the pro gram is active Automatic recirculated air control recirculated air mode You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu tants in the immediate environment by tempo rarily suspending the supply of outside air The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle Ta Press t
33. e g single CDs otherwise the CDs or the adapter may jam and no longer eject gt Do not use combined CDs DVDs e g DVD Plus as the CDs DVDs can jam and will no longer eject General malfunctions gt CD DVD changers and players have been optimized for performance in vehicles In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs DVDs than stationary devices would be gt Ifa CD DVD cannot be played first check whether it has been inserted correctly Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensation on the CD DVD or the laser s scan lens and temporarily prevent playback Malfunctions involving individual CDs DVDs If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs DVDs this can be due to one of the following Causes Home recorded CDs DVDs gt Possible reasons for malfunctions with home recorded CDs DVDs are inconsistent data creation or recording processes or poor quality or old age of the blank CD DVD gt Onlylabel CDs DVDs on the upper side with a pen intended for this purpose Damage gt Avoid fingerprints dust scratches and moisture Store CDs DVDs in a sleeve Do not subject CDs DVDs to temperatures over 122 F 50 C high humidity or direct sunlight CDs DVDs with copy protection CDs DVDs are often provided with a copy pro tection feature by the manufacturer This can mean that some CDs DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent MACROVISIO
34. gt Album track Bah een cattle ca fies L gt Number of tracks on the CD DVD Depending on the data some letters and num bers of the CD DVD may not be displayed cor gt Filename of track J m ai i a i a _ LI J nk essei Aug 10 1 rectly Random playbac 1 ee the ite if oo 1 CD Multimedia o change to a higher level directory move e 3 the controller to the left coy 3 Select the desired CD or DVD 4 Open Options Santana 5 Random 00 38 223 249 Options Prince E Santana D Sportfreunde Stiller T Tom Jones J Switch off control display cD Display Owner s Manual CD Multimedia Select rear source O Random Music data import export CDs DVDs with compressed audio files all tracks within the selected directory are played in 00 08 223 249 random order B Store in vehicle Da Le Yaleo v Africa Bamba Corazon Espinado Fe Random mode is switched off when the audio source is changed and the ignition is switched off gt Press and hold the button 182 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Automatic repeat The selected track directories or CDs DVDs are repeated automatically Video playback Country codes Only DVDs with the code of the home region can be played back also refer to the information on the DVD 1 USA Canada 2 Japan Europe Middle East South Af rica 3 Southeast Asia 4 Australia Central an
35. refer to page 66 is set manually Automatic Hold is deactivated auto matically Driving Automatic Hold is activated the vehicle is auto matically secured against rolling when it stops The indicator lamp lights up in green PARK Press on the accelerator to drive away The brake is released automatically O The indicator lamp goes out Lower lamp indicator lamp in Canadian models Before driving into a car wash Deactivate Automatic Hold otherwise the parking brake will be set when the vehicle is sta tionary and the vehicle will no longer be able to roll lt Parking The parking brake is automatically set if the en gine is switched off while the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold The indicator lamp changes from green to red The parking brake is not set if the engine PARK is switched off while the vehicle is coast ing to a halt Automatic Hold is deacti vated The parking brake can also be released after the engine is switched off e g ina car wash Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children for example cannot release the parking brake lt Malfunction In the event of a failure or malfunction of the parking brake secure the vehicle against rolling using a wheel chock for example when leaving it 69 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 i O m J O O Turn signal high beams
36. 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Sudden serious tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in advance lt The system does not operate correctly if it has not been reset For example a flat tire may be indicated despite correct tire inflation pres sures The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat tire gt Foramounted wheel without TPM electron ICS gt When the TPM is disturbed by other sys tems or devices with the same radio fre quency Status display The tire and system status Is indicated by the color of the tires A change in the tire inflation pressure during driving is taken into account A correction is only necessary if indicated by TPM Green The tire inflation pressure is equal to the target state One wheel is yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire All wheels are yellow gt A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in several tires gt The system was not reset after a wheel change and thus warns based on the infla tion pressures initialized last Gray The system cannot detect a flat tire Reasons for this may be gt TPMis being reset gt Disturbance by systems or devices with the same radio frequency gt Malfunction 93 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f Resetting the system Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
37. 05 2012 tt mm jjjj Format 6 Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller 7 Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller Status information Status field The following information is displayed in the sta tus field at the top right gt Time Current entertainment source Sound output on off Wireless network reception strength Telephone status V VY Y VY Traffic bulletin reception Status field symbols The symbols are grouped as follows Radio symbols TI Traffic bulletins switched on One of the symbols is displayed H HD Radio switched on K Satellite radio switched on Telephone symbols aa Incoming or outgoing call N Missed call alll Wireless network reception strength Symbol flashes network search alll Wireless network not available Bluetooth activated A Roaming is active DM Text message received os Check SIM card m SIM card blocked ZA SIM card missing a Enter PIN Entertainment symbols CD DVD player A Music collection O rocercce Gracenote database r4 AUX IN port AUX L Rear AUX IN port AUX R Rear AUX IN port on the right Je USB audio interface 22 l Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Additional symbols Spoken instructions switched off 4 A amp Request current vehicle position Split screen General information Additional inf
38. 1 Open Options 199 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 i 2 Select rear source 3 Select the desired audio or video source Same priority gt All audio and video sources can be operated via the iDrive in the front and rear gt Sound is output in the rear via headphones the source selected via the iDrive in the front is output on the vehicle loudspeakers gt Sound is output via loudspeakers the source selected last via the iDrive in the front or rear is output via the vehicle loudspeak ers The rear has priority gt When the source selected in the rear is played on headphones it can be selected but not operated via iDrive in the front Other audio or video sources can be operated gt Sound is output in the rear via headphones the source selected via the iDrive in the front is output on the vehicle loudspeakers gt Sound is output via loudspeakers the source selected in the rear is output on the vehicle loudspeakers Audio or video sour ces cannot be selected via the iDrive in the front Switching off the rear DVD gt Rear entertainment is switched off gt Toswitchrear entertainment back on select a different priority via the iDrive in the front and switch on the system refer to page 196 Headphones vehicle loudspeakers Connecting the headphones Normal headphones Connect via the jack 1 8 3 5 mm refer to page 196 on the rear CD DVD player co
39. 3 Speech mode 4 Select the setting kc Speech mode s Default Short Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button while giving an instruc tion until the desired volume is set gt The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed gt The volume is stored for the remote control currently in use Notes on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request In stressful situations the voice and vocal pitch can change This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel ephone connection Instead use the SOS button refer to page 246 in the vicinity of the interior mirror Environmental conditions gt Say the commands numbers and letters smoothly and with normal volume empha sis and speed gt Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system When selecting a radio station use the com mon pronunciation of the station name Keep the doors windows and glass sunroof closed to prevent noise interference Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking 26 i Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle Leaf forward Owner s Manual in the vehicle The Owner s Manual can be displayed on the Control Display in accordance with the equip v O i D ahead lt ment selected Methods of opening the Owner s Manual
40. 604 413 03 10 500 Adjusting Seats with safety belt The vehicle has four or five seating positions each of which is equipped with a safety belt gt The shoulder strap s anchorage point willbe correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted gt The two rear safety belt buckles integrated into the rear seat are for passengers sitting on the left and right gt The belt buckle embossed with the word CENTER is intended exclusively for use by passengers riding in the center position One person per safety belt Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger s lap lt Putting on the belt Lay the belt without twisting snugly across the lap and shoulders as close to the body as possible Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen Otherwise the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal im pact and injure the abdomen The safety belt must not lie across the neck rub on sharp edges be routed over solid or breaka ble objects or be pinched Reduction of restraining effect Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the belt from fitting properly and pull the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension across your lap otherwise the retention effect of the safety belt may be reduced lt 54 Buckling the belt belt buc
41. DVD manually refer to page 183 gt The volume of the rear vehicle speakers cannot be adjusted Sound in the rear is output via the head phones Change priority if necessary and output sound via vehicle speakers Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 201 c e3 4 J Eel e3 c LL Communication All of the options available to you for mobile communication with family friends business partners and service providers are described in this chapter Telephone Telephone At a glance The concept After the mobile phone is paired once with the vehicle the mobile phone can be operated using the iDrive the steering wheel buttons and spo ken instructions A paired mobile phone is automatically detected as soon as It Is located inside the vehicle when the ignition is switched on Up to four mobile phones can be paired Using the mobile phone while driving Make entries only when traffic and road conditions allow Do not hold the mobile phone in your hand while you are driving use the hands free system instead If you do not ob serve this precaution you can endanger the ve hicle occupants and other road users lt Snap in adapter The snap in adapter is used to gt Hold the mobile phone gt Recharge the battery gt Connect the mobile phone to an outside an tenna of the vehicle This provides for better network reception and consi
42. Exterior mirrors 58 External devices 192 External start 247 External temperature dis play 75 External temperature warn ing 75 Eyes for securing cargo 149 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 E Fader 172 Failure message refer to Check Control 83 False alarm refer to Uninten tional alarm 43 Fan refer to Air volume 129 Fault displays refer to Check Control 83 Filler neck for engine oil 236 Fine wood care 252 First aid kit 247 Fitting for towing refer to Tow fitting 248 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 95 Flat tire Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 92 Flat tire warning lamp 93 96 Flat tire wheel change 243 Flooding 147 Floor carpet care 253 Floor mats care 253 FM AM station 174 Fold out position windshield wipers 72 Foot brake 147 Front airbags 90 Front fog lamps 89 Front fog lamps front bulb re placement 242 Front lamps 241 Front passenger airbags au tomatic deactivation 91 Front passenger airbags indi cator lamp 92 Front seats adjusting 48 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 95 Fuel cap 224 Fuel consumption current 76 Fuel filler flap 224 Fuel gauge 77 Fuel quality 226 Fuel tank capacity 258 Fuse 245 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 G Garage door opener refer to Integrated universal remote control 134 Gas station recommenda tion 163 Gear change automatic trans mission 73 General driving notes 146 Glass sunroof refer to Pan
43. Malfunction Comfort Access may not function properly if it experiences interference from local radio waves e g mobile phones If this occurs open or close the vehicle using the buttons on the remote control or use a key in the door lock To subsequently start the engine hold the re mote control against the marked area on the steering column refer to page 33 Alarm system The concept The vehicle alarm system responds to gt Opening of a door the hood or the tailgate gt Movements in the vehicle interior motion sensor refer to page 43 gt Changes in the vehicle tilt e g during at tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car gt Interruptions in battery voltage The alarm system briefly indicates tampering gt By sounding an acoustic alarm gt By switching on the hazard warning system gt By flashing the high beams Arming and disarming the alarm system When you lock or unlock the vehicle either with the remote control or at the door lock the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time 42 l Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Door lock and armed alarm system Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm on some country specific versions This alarm can only be ended by pressing the button on the remote control Tailgate and armed alarm system The tailgate can be opened using the remote control even if the alarm system is armed Press the button on
44. R 275 35 R 20 102 Y XL F 245 35 R 21 96 Y XL R 275 30 R 21 98 Y XL 245 50 R 18 100 Y 245 50 R 18 100 V M S A S 245 50 R 18 100 H M S 245 45 R 19 102 V M S XL Pressure specifica tions in psi kPa 2 6 38 3 0 44 2 2132 2 4135 2 4135 2 6 38 Pressure specifica tions in psi kPa RARE Fp 2 3133 2 5 36 2 5 36 2 8 41 2 6 38 3 0 44 2 91 42 3 2 46 2 7139 3 2 46 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Tire identification marks Tire size 255 50 R 19 103 Y 255 nominal width in mm 50 aspect ratio in R radial tire code 19 rim diameter in inches 103 load rating not for ZR tires Y speed rating before the R on ZR tires Speed letter T up to 118 mph 190 km h H up to 131 mph 210 km h V up to 150 mph 240 km h W up to 167 mph 270 km h Y up to 186 mph 300 km h Tire Identification Number DOT code DOT xxxx xxx 3508 xxxx manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx tire size and tire design 3508 tire age Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U S Department of Transportation Tire age DOT 3508 the tire was manufactured in the 35th week in 2008 Recommendation regardless of wear replace tires at least every 6 years Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperatu
45. The following methods are available gt Quick reference Quick reference gt Key word search Owner s Manual gt Using pictures Search by pictures Press the button 1 2 Turn the controller open Vehicle Info 3 Press the controller 4 Select Quick reference Search by pictures or Owner s Manual t Vehicle Info Quick reference Search by pictures 2 Owner s Manual aie Onboard info i Trip computer Context sensitive help section of the Owner s Manual referring to the present function Therelevantinformation can be opened directly Opening via the iDrive To move directly from the application on the Control Display to the options menu E Press the button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the Options menu is displayed 2 Display Owner s Manual Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display Display Owner s Manual Changing between a function and the Driving tips Navigation Owner s Manual To change from a function e g radio to the Owner s Manual on the Control Display and to switch between the two displays Vehicle status Leafing through the Owner s Manual Press the button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the Options menu is displayed Page by page with link access 1 Turn the controller until the next or previous page is
46. Toclean the Control Display follow the care instructions refer to page 253 gt Donot place objects close to the Control Display otherwise the Control Display can be damaged Press the button 2 Switch off control display List Options EY Split screen Switch off control display Profile settings j Display Owner s Manual l Reset current profile Rename current profile inc Press the controller again to switch the screen back on Controller Select menu items and create settings 1 Turn 2 Press 19 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 3 Move in four directions Press the button Function MENU Opens the main menu RADIO Opens the Radio menu CD Opens the CD Multimedia menu NAV Opens the Navigation map view TEL Opens the Telephone menu BACK Displays the previous panel OPTION Opens the Options menu Operating concept Opening the main menu Press the button MENU m 2 Main menu CD Multimedia Telephone Navigation Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings The main menu is displayed 20 All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu Selecting menu items Menu items shown in white can be selected 1 Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted o Main menu CD Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info settings 2 Press the controller
47. When the same radio source is selected in the front and rear e g FM AM the same radio sta tion is played Operation is the same as for the front radio refer to page 174 CD multimedia CD DVD When the same audio source front CD DVD player rear CD DVD player DVD changer is se lected in the front and rear the same material is played Operation is the same as for the front CD DVD refer to page 181 Notes on CDs DVDs refer to page 186 Music collection Music can only be stored and data can only be exported and imported via the front CD DVD player or the USB interface in the glove com partment 198 When music collections are selected in the front and rear they are played back separately Operation is the same as for the front music col lection refer to page 187 Tone Only treble and bass can be set in the rear The settings are made separately for the left and right headphones Operation is the same as for the front tone refer to page 172 Contacts Operation is the same as for the front contacts refer to page 213 Navigation Route planning can be performed separately on the left and right sides in the rear Destination guidance can only be started from the front Operation is the same as for the front navigation refer to page 154 Suggesting a destination A destination or trip can be sent to the front as a suggestion The suggestion can be adopted stored or declined in the
48. a special destination Select the symbol 5 Start guidance or Add as another dest Ifa phone number is available a connection can be established if necessary Destination entry via BMW Assist A connection is established to the Concierge service refer to page 217 1 Navigation 2 Enter address 3 Open Options 4 BMW Assist dest entry Entering the special destination by its name 1 Navigation 2 Points of Interest 3 Name A Z search 4 Select the letters Depending on the distance the search may take some time The list can contain a max imum of 100 entries 5 Change to the list of special destinations 6 Highlight the special destination With the Professional navigation system A preview map Is displayed on the split screen 7 Select a special destination 8 Select the symbol 9 Start guidance Displaying special destinations in the map To display symbols of the special destinations in the map view Navigation Map Open Options aw eS Display Points of Interest Cy Options Switch off control display Map Display Owner s Manual lt o Arrow display on map 7 Settings Display Points of Interest Traffic Info categories 5 Select the setting Destination via map Opening the map 1 Navigation 158 i Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 2 Map Cs Selected position g The map section is displayed The map
49. above approx 30 mph 50 km h The system indicates whether there are vehicles in the blind spot arrow 1 or approaching from behind on the adjacent lane arrow 2 The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights up dimly Before you change lanes after setting the turn signal the system issues a warning in the situa tions described above The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vibrates Switching on off m Press the button gt On the LED lights up gt Off the LED goes out The system can issue warnings at speeds above approx 30 mph 50 km h The state is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Display Information stage The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or approaching from behind Warning If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the critical zone the steering wheel vibrates briefly and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes brightly The warning stops when the turn signal is switched off or the other vehicle leaves the crit ical zone System limits Personal responsibility The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver s personal judgment of the traffic situation In the event of a warning do not jerk the steering wheel as you may lose control over the vehi cle lt The function may be limited in the
50. an accident occurring lt Deceleration The system does not decelerate when a sta tionary obstacle is located in the same lane e g a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end of a traffic congestion The system also does not respond to gt Pedestrians or similarly slow road users Red traffic lights Stationary objects Cross traffic VV V OV Approaching traffic Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 No warnings you yourself must react as the system does not react to stopped vehicles A warning may not be issued when ap proaching a stationary or very slow moving ob stacle You must react yourself otherwise there is the danger of an accident occurring lt If the desired speed is too high for a curve the speed is reduced slightly in the curve although curves cannot be anticipated in advance There A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected fore drive into a curve at an appropriate speed until itis completely within the same laneas your In tight curves situations may result due to the vehicle restricted detection range of the system in which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not be detected at all or not until after a considerable If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly delay swerves into your lane the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis tance This also applies to major speed differ ences to vehicles driving ahead of you e g w
51. automatic car washes right from the start Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage Notes Note the following gt Make sure that the wheels and tires are not damaged by the transport mechanisms gt Fold inthe exterior mirrors otherwise they may be damaged depending on the width of the vehicle gt Deactivate the rain sensor refer to page 71 to avoid unintentional wiper acti vation Guide rails in car washes Avoid car washes with guide rails higher than 4 in 10 cm otherwise the vehicle body could be damaged lt Before driving into a car wash The vehicle is able to roll when the following steps are taken Press on the brake pedal 2 Engage transmission position N 3 Release the parking brake refer to page 67 or deactivate Automatic Hold refer to page 69 4 Switch the engine off Transmission position P with the igni tion off When the ignition is switched off position P is engaged automatically When in an auto matic car wash for example ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally lt The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in transmission position N A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle Transmission position Transmission position P is engaged automati cally gt When the ignition is switched off gt After approx 15 minutes Headlamps gt Donotrub dry and do
52. bar or on a flat bed Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts otherwise damage may result Secure the vehicle against rolling off Apply the parking brake after towing and secure the vehicle against rolling off if neces Sary Have the operability of transmission position P checked by the service center Tow starting Note Due to the automatic transmission the engine cannot be started by tow starting Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem edied Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Care Car washes Notes Steam jets or high pressure washers When using steam jets or high pressure washers hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of 140 F 60 C Holding them too close or using excessively high pressures or temperatures can cause dam age or preliminary damage that may then lead to long term damage Follow the operating instructions for the high pressure washer lt Cleaning sensors cameras with high pressure washers When using high pressure washers do not spray the exterior sensors and cameras e g Park Distance Control for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 12 in 30 cm lt Wash your vehicle frequently particularly in win ter Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ve hicle Washing in automatic car washes Your vehicle can be washed in
53. called up gt Your personal settings will be recognized and called up again even if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by someone else with another remote control The individual settings are stored for up to three remote controls Transmitting the settings Your personal settings can be taken with you to another vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro file function For more information contact your service center Transmission takes place via gt The USB interface in the glove compart ment onto a USB device Profile management Opening the profiles A different profile can be called up than the one associated with the remote control currently in use 1 Settings 2 Profiles S Settings Tone Speed Climate Lighting Door locks Profiles Allow rear control 3 Select a profile Renaming profiles 1 Settings 2 Profiles The current profile is selected 3 Open Options e5 S amp O J x Controls Driving tips AENEIS OIA Communication Entertainment oO 5 oO a oO aa Opening and closing 4 Rename current profile Iil Options EY Split screen Switch off control display Profile settings Display Owner s Manual Reset current profile Rename current profile EY Display user list at startup Resetting profiles The settings of the active profile are reset to their default values Settings 2 Profiles The curr
54. cess Ata glance A e ho J e 1S Driving tips Navigation Communication Entertainment Mobility oO pes oO Taje Oo a Navigation Map view Selecting the map view Your location is indicated on the map After destination guidance is started the plan ned route is displayed on the map The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use 1 Navigation 2 Map The following functions are directly available in the map view Symbol Function wy Starting ending destination guidance ry 4 Switching spoken instructions on off NX Changing the route criteria xs Searching for special destina tions A Displaying traffic bulletins E Interactive map A AN Map view settings OE Changing the scale Press the controller to show suppress addi tional information on the map Changing the map section Open the interactive map gt To shift the map move the controller in the required direction gt To shift the map diagonally move the con troller in the required direction and turn it Changing the scale 1 Q Select the symbol 2 Tochange the scale turn the controller 164 Automatically scaled map scale In the map view facing north turn the controller in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis played The map shows the entire range from your location to the destination Settings for the map view The map is shown
55. cluster refer to page 109 Maintaining storing or changing the speed The rocker switch can be pressed while the sys tem is interrupted to maintain and store the cur rent speed Adapting the desired speed Adapt the desired speed to the road con ditions and be ready to brake at all times other 108 wise there is the danger of an accident occur ring lt Speed differences Great speed differences with vehicles driving ahead of you e g when rapidly ap proaching a truck or when another vehicle swerves into your own lane cannot be compen sated for by the system lt Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set If active the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear gt Eachtimetherocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance the desired speed in creases or decreases by approx 1 mph 1 km h gt Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance the desired speed increases or decreases by a maximum of 5 mph 10 km h Max adjustable speed 110 mph 180 km h Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the action Distance Selecting a distance Adjust the distance according to the traffic and weather conditions otherwise there is the danger of an accident occurring Maintain the prescribed safety distance lt Reduce distance SA Press the button repeatedly until the a desired di
56. cm 181 8 2 979 O No of cylinders 6 iT Maximum output hp 300 S at engine speed rpm 5 800 6 250 S Maximum torque Ib ft Nm 300 407 at engine speed rom 1 200 5 000 z O O Displacement cu in cm 268 2 4 395 No of cylinders 8 Mobility 3 S c oD Se c3 Ge 0 257 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f Technical data Maximum output hp 400 at engine speed rom 5 500 6 400 Maximum torque lb ft Nm 450 610 at engine speed rom 1 750 4 500 uf tQ gt N Approved gross vehicle weight los kg 5 667 2 570 Load los kg 1 014 460 Approved front axle load los kg 2 580 1 170 Approved rear axle load los kg 3 263 1 480 Approved roof load capacity los kg 165 75 Trunk capacity cu ft l 15 5 60 440 1 700 Approved gross vehicle weight los kg 5 954 2 700 Load los kg 1 014 460 Approved front axle load los kg 2 811 1 275 Approved rear axle load los kg 3 308 1 500 Approved roof load capacity los kg 165 75 Trunk capacity cu ft l 15 5 60 440 1 700 Capacities Fuel tank US gal liters approx 18 5 70 Fuel quality refer to page 226 Windshield and headlamp US quarts liters approx 5 3 5 0 washer system 258 i Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Short commands for voice activation system To have the available spoken instructions read out loud Voice commands General information Instructions for voice activation system refer to page 25
57. driving situations may result 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds 4 Theresulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the YYY amount equals 1 400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ibs pas sengers in your vehicle the amount of avail able cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1 400 Ibs minus 750 Ibs 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transfered to your vehicle Consult the manual for transporting a trailer to determine how this may reduce the available cargo and luggage load ca pacity of your vehicle Load j Af ff fi lt Max Load hih OPO lt Maxtoad RERER lt Maxtoad The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo The greater the weight of the occupants the less cargo that can be transported Stowing cargo gt Heavy cargo stow as far forward and as low as possible ideally directly behind the trunk partition gt Very heavy cargo when the rear seat is not occupi
58. following sit uations gt When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own gt In heavy fog rain or snowfall gt In tight curves or on narrow lanes Malfunctions Steering wheel vibration Frequent activation of the steering wheel vibra tion causes the system to overheat This causes Active Blind Spot Detection to be come deactivated Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressing the button Radar sensors Controls The radar sensors are located under the rear bumper The system may not be fully functional in the following situations gt Dirty or icy bumper gt Stickers on the bumper A message is displayed when the system is not fully functional For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC Federal Communication Commission regulations Operation is governed by the following FCC ID gt NBGOO9014A Compliance statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions gt This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and gt this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user s authority to operate this equipment 99 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Brake force display The concept Sa
59. for the cruising range is dis played in the instrument cluster Selection lists in the instrument cluster The concept IR The following functions can be operated using the buttons and the thumb wheel on the steering wheel and the display in the instrument cluster gt Current audio source gt Redial on telephone gt Activation of the voice activation system At a glance Navigation Communication Controls n Q _ e2 2 m Entertainment Y O c D 2 D aa Displays Activating a list and creating the setting Press a button on the right side of the steering wheel or turn the thumb wheel to activate the required list Create the setting using the thumb wheel Computer Calling up information on the info display Press the computer button on the turn signal lever Information is displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster Information at a glance Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever displays the information on the info dis play in the following order gt Range gt Average fuel consumption gt Average speed gt Date gt Speed Limit Display Time of arrival After entering the distance or when desti nation guidance is activated in the naviga tion system gt Distance to destination After entering the distance or when desti nation guidance is activated in the naviga tion s
60. front passenger seat the backrest width must be opened completely Do not change the adjustment after this otherwise the stability of the child seat will be reduced lt Child seat security x The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be locked against pulling out for mounting the child restraint fixing systems Locking the safety belt 1 Pull out the belt webbing completely 2 Secure the child restraint fixing system with the belt 3 Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and pull it taut against the child restraint fixing system The safety belt is locked Unlocking the safety belt 1 Unbuckle the belt buckle 2 Remove the child restraint fixing system 3 Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com pletely LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil dren Note Manufacturer s information for LATCH child restraint fixing systems To mount and use the LAT CH child restraint fix ing systems observe the operating and safety information from the system manufacturer oth erwise the level of protection may be re duced Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors Correctly engage the lower LATCH an chors Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint fix ing system is resting snugly against the back rest otherwise the degree of protection offered may be reduced lt Mounts for the lower
61. have an unobstructed view of the sky The channel name is displayed in the status line Enabling channels The Unsubscribed Channels category contains all disabled channels 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 lt Category f ru I a j Satellite radio amp Snow Patrol Category Chasing Cars Cu i All channels 001 Sirius Hits 1 Ea v 002 StarLite 003 Sirius Love 004 Movin EZ 4 Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate gory 5 Select the desired channel The phone number and an electronic serial number ESN are displayed 6 Select the phone number to have the chan nel enabled Subscribe to Sirius Call Sirius to subscribe ESN 020 373 371 411 1 888 539 SIRIUS You can unsubscribe from the channels again via this phone number Unsubscribing from channels 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 Open Options 4 Manage subscription Options Store channel Satellite radio Display Owner s Manual Manage subscription Set jump Radio Select rear source 176 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 5 The phone number and an electronic serial number ESN are displayed 6 Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan nels Selecting channels You can only listen to enabled channels The selected channel is stored for the remote control currently in use Via the iDrive 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 Select All channe
62. i ie o 239 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Replacing components Replacing components Tool kit x b A a P y 1 7 f The tool kit is located in the rear compartment in the trunk refer to page 143 Wiper blade replacement Replacing the wiper blades 1 To change the wiper blades fold up refer to page 72 the wiper arms 2 Fold up the wipers 3 Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po sition 4 Remove the wiper blade toward one side 240 Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed this may damage the wind shield lt Lamp and bulb replacement General information Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to your service center if you are unfamiliar with them or they are not described here You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at your service center Danger of burns Only change bulbs when they are cool otherwise there is the danger of getting burned Working on the lighting system When working on the lighting system you should always switch off the lights affected to prevent short circuits To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer lt Do not touch the
63. if the safety switch for the power windows has been pressed pI Also supports the back in the shoulder area gt Results in a relaxed seating position 52 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 gt Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles Reset to standard position Maintain pressure on the button until the system completes the adjustment Seat heating Switching on Press the button once for each temper ature level The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit Switching off Press the button longer The LEDs go out Temperature distribution The heating action in the seat cushion and back rest can be distributed in different ways 1 Climate 2 Seat heating rear 3 Select the required seat g Seat heating rear iw Rear left a dees right a O m J O O 4 Turn the controller to set the temperature distribution Active seat ventilation J o Switching on z Press the button once for each ventila tion level The highest level is active when three LEDs are lit Switching off Press the button longer The LEDs go out Safety belts General information Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving away Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection they are not a substitute for safety belts 53 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2
64. in some mobile phones e g authorization or a se cure connection refer to the mobile phone operating instructions Activating deactivating Bluetooth Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations 1 Telephone 2 Open Options 3 Bluetooth Ai Optionen EY Splitscreen Control Display ausschalten Telefon Betriebsanleitung anzeigen EY Bluetooth Telefon Bluetooth Info Connecting a particular mobile phone If more than one mobile phone is detected by the vehicle the mobile phone at the top of the list is connected A different mobile phone can be connected by selecting it Telephone 2 Bluetooth telephone All paired mobile phones are listed 3 Select the mobile phone that is to be con nected 9 Bluetooth telephone Configuration of Bluetooth telephone services Add new phone Handy 1 Handy 2 Handy 3 Connected Paired 205 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 c e 2 e O Telephone Unpairing the mobile phone a 2 Telephone Bluetooth telephone All paired mobile phones are listed Highlight the mobile phone that is to be un paired Open Options Remove phone from list sf Options EY Split screen Switch off control display Handy 2 ee Opay Owners Manual Remove phone from list Telephone G Bluetooth telephone What to do if Not all phone book entries are displ
65. is running 4 TeleService Help After completion of TeleService Help a voice connection is established to Roadside Assis tance 218 Activating BMW Assist General information If the services included in a Assist subscription are not displayed they may need to be activated Activating 1 Make sure that the vehicle can determine its current position Reception is usually best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky 2 Switch on the ignition 3 Activate BMW Assist Activation may take several minutes If another menu is opened activation continues running in the background BMW Search Ata glance A business search can be opened via BMW Search License conditions This product contains NetFront Browser soft ware of ACCESS Co Ltd Copyright 2007 ACCESS Co Ltd All rights reserved NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark of ACCESS CO LTD in Japan and other coun tries This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Requirements gt Subscription to the optional Convenience Plan gt The date setting refer to page 80 on the Control Display is current gt The vehicle is located within wireless net work coverage Starting BMW Search 1 BMW Assist Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 2 BMW Search BMW Assist Concierge Messages Roadside Assistance BMW Search Customer Relations Service
66. lock unlock Malfunction Local radio waves may interfere with the remote control If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un locked with the remote control the battery is discharged Replace the battery refer to page 32 If this occurs unlock or lock the vehicle at the door lock using the key For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC Federal Communication Commission regulations Operation is governed by the following FCC ID LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS LX8CAS2 MYTCAS4 Compliance statement VV VV OV 37 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions gt This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and gt this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Using the door lock General information Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there are people in it as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge Remove the key before pulling the door handle Before pulling the outside door handle remove the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the key In some country specific versi
67. malfunctions in the monitored systems A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lamps and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head up Display In addition an acoustic signal may be output and a text message may appear on the Control Dis play 83 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f Indicator warning lamps The indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on Text messages Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps Supplementary text messages Additional information on the Control Display e g on the cause of a malfunction or the re quired action can be called up via Check Con trol The text of urgent messages is displayed auto matically Hiding Check Control messages Press the computer button on the turn signal lever gt Some Check Control messages are dis played continuously and are not cleared un til the malfunction is eliminated If several At a glance Ly e Le a e O Driving tips NEEL OIA Communication Entertainment Mobility w 1S eb pes oO t oO aa Displays malfunctions occ
68. on the Control Display 1 Open Options 2 Settings Set the optimized map view gt Day night mode Select and create the necessary settings depending on the light conditions When the traffic situation gray card is activated this setting is not taken into account gt With the Professional navigation system Satellite images Depending on availability and resolution satellite images are displayed at scales of approx 1 mile to 600 miles 2 km to 1 000 km gt With the Professional navigation system Perspective view in 3D Displays a spatial view Prominent areas that are contained in the navigation data are dis played on the map in 3D gt Traffic situation gray map The map is optimized for displaying traffic bulletins Symbols for the special destina tions are no longer displayed With the Professional navigation system Map view for split screen The map view can be selected for the split screen independently from the main screen Open Options 2 Split screen EY The split screen is switched on 3 Tilt the controller to the right until the split screen contents are selected 4 Select the map view Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 gt Map facing north gt Map direction of travel gt Map view with perspective 5 Tochange the scale change to the split screen and turn the controller Traffic bulletins Ata glance gt Display the traffic bu
69. operating the equipment via the iDrive Terminating the voice activation system Briefly press the button on the steering wheel or gt Cancek Possible commands Y O ae D od lt Having possible commands read aloud The commands available in each case depend on the menu item selected on the Control Dis play Have the available spoken instructions read aloud using Voice commands If for example Settings is selected the com mands to the settings are read aloud Executing functions using short commands Functions on the main menu can be performed directly by means of short commands irrespec tive of which menu item is currently selected e g Vehicle status List of short voice activation commands refer to page 259 Example playing back a CD 1 Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary ee es wheel 3 gt C D and multimedia The medium last played is played back 4 Gs wheel 5 gt C D track lt e g CD track 4 Press the button on the steering Press the button on the steering Setting the voice dialog You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter version In the shorter version of the voice dialog the prompts and responses from the system are ab breviated 23 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Voice activation system On the Control Display 1 Settings 2 Language Units
70. or covered 113 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Driving comfort Prewarning sensitivity If the prewarning setting is too sensitive there may be an excess of false warnings Cruise control The concept The system is functional at soeeds beginning at approx 20 mph 30 km h It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering wheel The system brakes on downhill gradients if en gine braking action is insufficient Unfavorable conditions Do not use the system if unfavorable con ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant speed for instance gt On curvy roads gt In heavy traffic gt On slippery roads in fog snow or rain or on a loose road surface Otherwise you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident lt Controls Buttons at a glance System on off interrupt Resume speed Store speed A ON Store maintain change speed 114 Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel ie The marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed Cruise control can be used When the speed limit is switched on DSC Dy namic Stability Control refer to page 101 is switched on as well if necessary Switching off Deactivated or interrupted system If the system is deactivated or interrupted actively intervene by braking and if necessary with evasive maneuvers otherwise there is the danger of an ac
71. or tailgate gt Press a button on the remote control gt Press the Start Stop button Calling up with the remote control The driver s seat exterior mirror and steering wheel position selected last is stored for the currently used remote control Pinch hazard when moving back the seat If this function is used first make sure that the footwell behind the driver s seat is empty Otherwise people can be injured or objects damaged when the seat is moved back lt The adjustment procedure is interrupted When a seat position switch is pressed gt Whenamemory button is touched 1 Settings 2 Door locks 3 Last seat position auto sc Door locks Unlock button All doors O Last seat position auto Lock if no door is opened Lock after start to drive Acoustic sig lock unlock Flash when lock unlock Mirrors Exterior mirrors General information The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver s mirror Estimating distances correctly Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror as this will increase your risk of an accident At a glance pa 1 Adjusting 2 Left right Automatic Curb Monitor 3 Foldin and out Selecting a mirror To change over to the other mirror Slide the mirror changeover switch Adjusting electrically The setting corresponds to the dir
72. p lt 1 Headliner 18 10 Py PDC Park Distance Con 2 Control Display 19 A trol 115 3 Glove compartment 140 Top View 118 4 Airvent 131 Backup camera 120 5 Hazard warning system 246 Side View 122 Central locking system 38 11 sPort Dynamic Driving Control 103 en conroat 6 Radio 174 a a Stability Con CD Multimedia 181 7 Automatic climate control 128 12 Transmission selector lever 8 Controller with buttons 19 9 Parking brake 66 Auto Hold 68 AUTO H 17 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 All around the headliner 1 Emergency Request 246 A z Reading lamps 89 SOS N P Glass sunroof powered 45 5 Interior lamps 89 3 amp Indicator lamp front passenger OFF 7 s airbag 92 18 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 iDrive The concept The iDrive combines the functions of a multitude of switches Thus these functions can be oper ated from a central location Using the iDrive during a trip To avoid becoming distracted and posing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle s occu pants and to other road users never attempt to use the controls or enter information unless traf fic and road conditions allow this lt Controls at a glance Controls 1 Control Display 2 Controller with buttons The buttons can be used to open the menus directly The controller can be used to select menu items and create the settings Control Display gt
73. phone number can also be entered by voice Call on hold indicated by a green handset To switch to the call on hold select this handset 207 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Telephone Establishing a conference call Two calls can be connected to a single tele phone conference call 1 Establish two calls 2 Conference call amp F Active calls 498912345678 AN 00 29 A p 498998765421 N i 03 16 wird gehalten 7 Hold keypad dialing Conference call When terminating a conference call both calls are ended If one call is terminated by another party the other call can be continued l 4 Phone book Displays The phone book accesses the contacts and shows all contacts for which a phone number has been stored The entries can be selected to make a call 1 Telephone 2 Phone book All contacts with a phone number are displayed A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts refer to page 213 SF Phone book q A Z search Angi BMW Service Christoph Dr Tom Mustermann Office Calling a contact 1 Select the desired contact Select the symbol Contact with one phone number The connection is being es tablished 2 Ol Select the symbol Contact with more than one phone number Select the phone number the connection is being estab lished X A telephone call is not possible the mobile phone has no coverage or no network or a S
74. press it For some DVDs settings can only be made via the DVD menu refer also to the information on the DVD Selecting the language The languages that are available depend on the DVD Turn the controller during playback 2 Open Options 3 Audio language J Options i Switch off control display DVD video Display Owner s Manual Audio lanquage Subtitles Display settings Additional options 4 Select the desired language The subtitles that are available depend on the DVD 1 Turn the controller during playback 2 Open Options 3 Subtitles 184 4 Select the desired language or Do not display subtitles qf Subtitles Do not display subtitles German English Setting the brightness contrast and color Turn the controller during playback Open Options Display settings WON gt Brightness Contrast or Color Display settings 0 Brightness Contrast U Color 5 Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller Selecting the zoom Display the video image on the entire screen Turn the controller during playback Open Options Additional options gt wN gt Zoom mode Options O Zoom mode Select title Viewing angle Main menu Back Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Selecting a track DVD video 1 Turn the controller when the DVD menu is displayed 2 Op
75. red a sig nal sounds and the brake lamps light up Indicator lamp in Canadian models If the vehicle is braked to a speed of approx 2 mph 3 km h the parking brake remains set Releasing O Press the switch while the brake pedal is ma pressed or transmission position P is en gaged The LED and indicator lamp go out The parking brake is released Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children for example cannot release the parking brake lt Manual release The parking brake can be released manually in the event of a power failure or electrical fault Before releasing secure the vehicle against rolling Before releasing the parking brake manually and whenever you park the vehicle with the parking brake released ensure that position P of the automatic transmission is engaged Secure the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the inclination of the road e g with a wheel chock otherwise there is the danger of the ve hicle rolling 67 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f If it also becomes necessary to release the transmission lock of the automatic transmission manually follow this sequence 1 Secure the vehicle against rolling 2 Manually release the parking brake Unlocking 1 Raise the rear floor cover in the trunk ar row 1 and fasten it with a retaining strap 3 Take out the floor trim in the trunk
76. same side on both vehicles gt ire o Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle please observe the following 249 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Breakdown assistance gt Maneuvering capability is limited during cor nering gt The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle make sure that the tow rope is taut To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing always use nylon ropes or nylon straps Attaching the tow rope correctly Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit ting otherwise damage can occur when it is se cured on other parts of the vehicle lt Tow truck Vehicle without manual parking lock Have vehicles transported on a loading platform only Do not tow the vehicle with the front or rear axle lifted individually or the vehicle can be dam aged lt Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts otherwise damage may result Secure the vehicle against rolling off Apply the parking brake after towing and secure the vehicle against rolling off if neces Sary Have the operability of transmission position P checked by the service center Vehicle with manual parking lock 250 Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck with a so called lift
77. settings Automatic climate control refer to page 128 settings Steering wheel position refer to page 60 gt Navigation refer to page 154 map views route criteria voice output on off gt Night Vision with pedestrian detection refer to page 123 selection of functions and type of display 34 f Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 gt Daytime running lights refer to page 87 current setting gt Park Distance Control PDC refer to page 173 adjusting the signal tone volume gt Radio refer to page 174 stored stations station listened to last special settings gt Backup camera refer to page 120 selec tion of functions and type of display gt Side View refer to page 122 selection of the display type gt Language on the Control Display refer to page 81 gt Lane departure warning refer to page 97 last setting on off gt Active Blind Spot Detection refer to page 98 last setting on off gt Triple turn signal activation refer to page 70 gt Locking the vehicle refer to page 38 after a brief period or after starting to drive Central locking system The concept The central locking system becomes active when the driver s door is closed The system simultaneously engages and re leases the locks on the following gt Doors gt Tailgate gt Fuel filler flap Operating from the outside gt Via the remote control gt Via the driver s do
78. system is set to the lowest tem perature maximum air volume and recirculated air mode Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re gion Open them for this purpose Air is cooled as quickly as possible gt Atan external temperature of approx 32 F 0 C gt When the engine is running Parked car ventilation The concept The parked car ventilation ventilates the vehicle interior and lowers its temperature if necessary The system can be switched on and off directly or by using two preset switch on times It re mains switched on for 30 minutes They can be operated via iDrive Parked car ventilation Using the preset switch on time or when oper ated directly any external temperature Open the vents to allow air to flow out Switching on off directly 1 Settings 2 Climate 133 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f 3 Activate parked car vent lt lt Climate Seat heating distribution Seat heating rear O Rear climate control O Activate parked car vent O Activate Timer 1 Timer 1 O Activate Timer 2 Y The system is switched on The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes The system continues to run for some time after being switched off Preselecting the switch on time 1 Settings 2 Climate 3 Timer 1 or Timer 2 4 Enter the desired time 5 Press the controller to adopt the setting Activating the switch on time
79. the basis of speed differences between the individual wheels while driving In the event of a pressure loss the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corre sponding wheel change This is detected and reported as a flat tire Functional requirements The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct otherwise reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured In itialize the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change System limits Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in ad vance lt A natural even pressure loss in all four tires can not be detected i O mn had O O The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations gt When the system has not been initialized gt When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface gt Sporty driving style slip in the drive wheels high lateral acceleration gt When driving with snow chains Initialization The initialization process adopts the set inflation tire pressures as reference values for the detec tion of a flat tire Initialization is started by con firming the inflation pressures Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status 3 Reset Vehicle status Wy u 4 Start the engine do not drive aw
80. the lighter The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out Danger of burns Only hold the hot lighter by its head oth erwise there is the danger of getting burned Press on the cover Switch off the ignition and take the remote con trol with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn them selves lt Remove the cover or cigarette lighter 136 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 1 Place your hands into the two recessed grips on the bottom of the cover 2 e O Remove the cover 2 Push up the cover The cover can be stowed in the rear compart ment in the trunk refer to page 143 nstallinc 1 Insert the trunk cover into the two front re taining pins To access the socket fold open the cover Trunk Trunk cover Do not deposit heavy objects Do not deposit heavy or hard objects on the trunk cover Otherwise they could endanger occupants during braking and evasive maneu vers for example lt To load bulky luggage the cover can be re moved Through loading system The trunk can be expanded by folding down the trunk partition and the rear seat backrest 137 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 t ior equipmen Inter The trunk partition and the rear backrest are subdivided at a ratio of 40 20 40 You can also fold down the left and right sides separately Fold
81. to cal culate a new route suggestion 168 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 uejp e y s 01 Uu09 sd ulang uo1 e IneN yu wuieyua zuz fuoneviunwwog 169 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 i Entertainment The chapter helps assure your enjoyment when receiving radio and television stations and playing CDs DVDs and tracks from the music collection Tone Tone General information The sound settings are stored for the remote control currently in use Treble bass balance and fader gt Balance left right volume distribution gt Fader front rear volume distribution Setting treble bass balance and fader 1 CD Multimedia Radio or Settings 2 Tone Satellite radio Presets Weather band Tone Tone Treble Bass ETENEE TTE Balance L i Fader F i Equalizer LY Surround Volume settings 4 To adjust turn the controller 5 Toconfirm press the controller Equalizer Setting for individual audio frequency ranges Adjusting the equalizer 1 CD Multimedia Radio or Settings 2 Tone 3 Equalizer 4 Select the desired setting G Equalizer 100 Hz 200 Hz 500 Hz 1 KHz 2 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz 5 To adjust turn the controller 6 To store press the controller Multi channel playback surround Choose between stereo and multi channel play back surround
82. town city Entering a town city The town city can either be said as a word or spelled 1 City lt or Spell city 2 Wait for the system to prompt you for the town city 3 Say the name of the town city or name at least the first three letters Depending on the entry up to 20 towns cit ies may be suggested 4 Select the town city gt To select a recommended town city Yes gt To select a different town city New entry Select an entry Entry lt e g entry 2 gt To spell an entry Spell city Entering a street or intersection Enter a street or intersection in the same way as you would enter a town city Entering a house number House numbers can be entered up to the num ber 999 999 House number Say each digit separately Starting destination guidance gt Start guidance or if necessary Enter new destination Storing a destination The destination is automatically added to the list of last destinations Planning a trip New trip Additional intermediate destinations can be en tered for a trip 1 Navigation 2 Map 3 Select the symbol 4 Enter new destination Cs Current destination Destination 1 of 2 MUNCHEN PETRUELRING lt tart guidance Enter new destination Display all trip dest Go to next dest in the trip 5 Select the type of destination entry and en ter the intermediate destination Cs New destination Enter address us
83. use of retreaded tires Retreaded tires Possibly substantial variations in the de sign and age of the tire casing structures can limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety lt Winter tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures below 45 F 7 C Although so called all season M S tires do pro vide better winter traction than summer tires they do not provide the same level of perform ance as winter tires gt E Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires then display a corresponding sign in the field of 231 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Wheels and tires vision You can obtain this sign from the tire spe cialist or from your service center Maximum speed for winter tires Do not exceed the maximum speed for the winter tires otherwise tire damage and acci dents can occur lt Run flat tires For your own safety only use run flat tires No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire Your service center will be glad to advise you Rotating wheels between axles The manufacturer of your vehicle advises against swapping wheels between the front and rear axles This can impair the handling characteristics Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possi
84. user profile Details on the service requirements refer to page 82 can be displayed on the Control Dis play Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is con tinuously stored in the remote control Your service center will read out this data and suggest the right array of service procedures for your ve hicle Therefore hand your service specialist the re mote control that you used most recently Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle bat tery was disconnected are not taken into ac count If this occurs have a service center update the time dependent maintenance procedures such as checking brake fluid and if necessary changing the engine oil and the microfilter acti vated charcoal filter 238 Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service requirements Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center Make sure to have regular maintenance procedures recorded in the vehi cle s Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models These en tries are proof of regular maintenance Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnostics On the
85. view Depending on the map scale a traffic obstruc tion s length direction and impact are displayed in the map using triangles or gray bars along the calculated route Filtering of traffic bulletins Set which traffic bulletins are to be displayed in the map 1 Navigation 2 Map 166 Open Options Traffic Info categories Set the filter ae p Cp Categories LY Traffic flow EY Roadwork gt Closed roads Traffic disruptions Traffic bulletins of the selected category are dis played in the map gt Traffic bulletins on incidents along the route are always displayed gt For your own safety traffic bulletins that no tify you of potentially dangerous situations such as wrong way drivers cannot be hid den Traffic bulletins during destination guidance gt Dynamic guidance refer to page 162 This feature influences the behavior of the system gt During destination guidance obstructions on the route are taken into consideration gt Dangerous situations are displayed regard less of the setting Traffic obstructions The system calculates the optimized route tak ing into consideration traffic obstructions and road types Selecting a detour Set whether traffic obstructions should be taken into consideration during route planning Navigation 2 Traffic Info 3 Select a traffic obstruction that you wish to bypass 4 Recomm detour Online Edition f
86. wheel change 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status 3 Reset TPM EF Vehicle status Ly lt AN 4 Start the engine do not drive away 5 Reset the tire pressure using Reset 6 Drive away The tires are shown in gray and Resetting TPM is displayed After driving for a few minutes the set tire infla tion pressures are applied as set values The re setting process is completed automatically dur ing driving The tires are shown in green and TPM active is shown on the Control Display The trip can be interrupted at any time If you drive away again the process resumes auto matically If a flat tire is detected during a reset all tires are displayed in yellow Low tire pressure message The yellow warning lamp lights up A message appears on the Control Dis play In addition a signal sounds gt There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in flation pressure gt The system was not reset after a wheel change and thus warns based on the infla tion pressures initialized last Cautiously reduce the vehicle speed to below 50 mph 80 km h At a glance Ly e Le a e O Driving tips Navigation fofeyailialelaliersidtelal Entertainment Y O D 2 O aa Safety Do not continue driving without run flat tires Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run flat tires continued driving may result in serious acciden
87. when driving in bends Activating TRACTION cgs Press the button TRACTION is displayed in the tachom eter The DSC indicator lamp in the instrument clus ter lights up Deactivating TRACTION EP Press the button again OFF a TRACTION andthe DSC indicator lamp go out 104 Indicator warning lamps When DTC is activated TRACTION is displayed in the tachometer amp The indicator lamp lights up DTC Dy namic Traction Control is activated SPORT Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus pension during limited driving stabilization Dynamic Traction Control is switched on The driver handles several of the stabilization tasks Activating SPORT TE Press the button repeatedly until SPORT appears in the tachometer and the DSC indicator lamp lights up in the in strument cluster Indicator warning lamps SPORT is displayed in the tachometer amp The indicator lamp lights up DTC Dy namic Traction Control is activated SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension for greater driving agility with maximum driving sta bilization The program can be configured to individual specifications The configuration is stored for the remote con trol currently in use Activating SPORT UE Press the button repeatedly until SPORT appears in the tachometer Configuring SPORT When the display is activated on the Control Display refer to page 105 the sport program can be set to in
88. your driving style to the situation An appropriate driving style is always the responsibility of the driver The laws of physics cannot be repealed even with DSC Therefore do not reduce the additional safety margin by driving in a risky manner lt Deactivating activating the DSC OFF program The program can be deactivated activated via Dynamic Driving Control refer to page 103 Indicator warning lamps The indicator lamp flashes DSC con oe trols the drive forces and brake forces The indicator lamp lights up DSC has failed DTC Dynamic Traction Control The concept The DTC system is aversion of the DSC in which forward momentum is optimized The system ensures maximum forward momen tum on special road conditions e g unplowed snowy roads but driving stability is limited It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri ate caution You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un der the following special circumstances gt When driving in slush or on uncleared snow covered roads gt When rocking the vehicle or driving off in deep snow or on loose surfaces gt When driving with snow chains 101 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 i O J O O tability control systems ivings Dr Deactivating activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control The system can be deactivated activated via the TRACTION and SPORT programs of the Dy namic Driving Contr
89. 0 500 f At a glance Controls Driving tips Navigation sja O z k J u O p c T Communication Mobility Reference Everything from A to Z Everything from A to Z Index A ABS Antilock Brake Sys tem 101 ACC Active Cruise Control with Stop amp Go 107 Accessories and parts 7 Activated charcoal filter 130 Active Blind Spot Detec tion 98 Active Cruise Control with Stop amp Go ACC 107 Active seat front 50 Active seat ventilation front 51 Active seat ventilation rear 53 Active Steering integral 102 Adaptive brake assistant 101 Adaptive brake lights refer to Brake force display 100 Adaptive light control 87 Adaptive light control bulb re placement 241 Additives oil 236 Adjustments seats head re straints 48 After washing vehicle 252 Airbags 90 Air circulation refer to Recir culated air mode 129 Air distribution manual 128 Air drying refer to Cooling function 130 Air pressure tires 227 Air vents refer to Ventila tion 131 Air volume automatic climate control 129 Alarm system 42 Alarm unintentional 43 All around the center con sole 17 266 All around the headliner 18 All around the steering wheel 12 ALL program automatic cli mate control 130 All season tires refer to Win ter tires 231 Alternating code hand held transmitter 135 Alternative oil types 236 AM FM station 174 Announcement navigation refer to Spoken in
90. 181 DVD CD notes 186 DVD CD player rear 196 DVD changer 185 DVD settings 184 DVDs storing 187 DVD video 183 Dynamic Damping Con trol 102 Dynamic destination guid ance 162 Dynamic Drive 102 Dynamic Driving Control 103 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 101 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 101 E EfficientDynamics refer to Saving fuel 150 Electronic displays instru ment cluster 16 Electronic engine oil level check 236 Electronic Stability Program ESP refer to DSC 101 Emergency detection remote control 33 Emergency release door lock 38 Emergency release fuel filler flap 224 Emergency release parking brake 67 Emergency Request 246 Emergency service refer to Roadside Assistance 247 Emergency start function en gine start 33 Emergency unlocking tail gate 41 Energy Control 76 Energy regeneration 77 Engine compartment 234 Engine compartment working in 234 Engine coolant 237 Engine oil 236 Engine oil adding 236 Engine oil additives 236 Engine oil filler neck 236 Engine oil temperature 76 Engine oil types alterna tive 236 Engine oil types ap proved 236 Engine specifications 257 Engine start during malfunc tion 33 Engine start Help 247 Engine start refer to Starting the engine 65 Engine stop 66 Engine temperature 76 Equalizer 172 Equipment interior 134 ESP Electronic Stability Pro gram refer to DSC 101 Exchanging wheels tires 231 Exhaust system 146
91. 187 Cell phone 204 Center armrest 141 Center console 17 Central locking system 35 Central screen refer to Control Display 19 Changes technical refer to Safety 6 Changing parts 240 Changing wheels tires 231 Check Control 83 Children seating position 61 Children transporting safely 61 Child restraint fixing sys tem 61 Child restraint fixing system LATCH 62 Child restraint fixing systems mounting 61 Child safety locks 64 Child seat mounting 61 Child seats 61 Chrome parts care 252 Cigarette lighter 136 Climate control 128 Climate control wind shield 147 Clock 76 Closing opening from in side 38 Closing opening via door lock 37 Closing opening with remote control 35 Clothes hooks 142 Collision warning iBrake 112 Combination instrument 14 Combination instrument elec tronic displays 16 Combination switch refer to Turn signals 70 Combination switch refer to Wiper system 70 Comfort Access 41 COMFORT program Dynamic Driving Control 105 Computer 78 Concierge service 217 Condensation on win dows 129 Condensation under the vehi cle 148 Condition Based Service CBS 238 Confirmation signal 37 Contacts 213 Control Display 19 Control Display care 253 Control Display settings 80 Controller 19 Control systems driving sta bility 101 Convenient opening 36 Convenient operation 37 Coolant 237 Coolant temperature 76 Cooling function 130 Cooling maximum 129
92. 2 Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller Camera The camera lens is located in the handle of the tailgate The image quality may be impaired by dirt Clean the lens refer to page 253 122 Side View The concept Side View provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersections Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected relatively late from the driver s seat To improve visibility two cameras in the front of the vehicle record the traffic situation on each side System limits The cameras capture a maximum range of 330 ft 100 m Display The images from both cameras are shown si multaneously on the Control Display Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve hicle on blind driveways and intersections with your own eyes Otherwise an accident could re sult from road users or objects located outside the picture area of the Side View cameras lt Switching off automatically System switches off above approx 9 mph 15 km h Switch on the system again if necessary Switching on off manually O Press the button Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Display on the Control Display The traffic area to the left and right is displayed on the Control Display Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the position of
93. 243 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Replacing components Jacking points for the vehicle jack The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo cated in the positions shown Lug bolt lock gt Lug bolt arrow 1 gt Adapter arrow 2 Removing 1 Attach the adapter to the wheel lug 2 Unscrew the lug bolt Remove the adapter after screwing the lug bolt back on 244 Vehicle battery Maintenance The battery is maintenance free i e the elec trolyte will last for the life of the battery Your service center will be glad to advise you on questions regarding the battery Battery replacement Use approved vehicle batteries only Only use vehicle batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer otherwise the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully availa ble After a battery replacement have the battery registered on the vehicle by your service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available Charging the battery In the vehicle only charge the battery via the terminals refer to page 247 in the engine com partment with the engine off Power failure After a temporary power loss some equipment needs to be reinitialized Individual settings need to be reprogrammed gt Seat mirror and steering wheel memory store the positions again refer to page 57 gt Time update refer to page 80
94. 3 10 500 Press the wiper levers down The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released gt Brief wipe press down once gt Toswitch off normal wipe press down once gt To switch off fast wipe press down twice Rain sensor The time between wipes is controlled automat ically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall The sensor is located on the windshield directly in front of the interior rearview mirror Press the button on the wiper lever When activated the wipers move over the wind shield once The LED in the steering column stalk lights up Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash otherwise dam age could be caused by undesired wiper activa tion lt Turn the thumb wheel Washing the windshield headlamps Pull the lever The system sprays washer fluid on the wind shield and activates the wipers briefly In addition the headlamps are cleaned at regular intervals when the vehicle lights are switched on Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield oth erwise your vision could be obscured For this reason use antifreeze Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty otherwise you could damage the pump lt Windshield washer nozzles The washer jets are automati
95. 678 Accept DE e s t a i i i i Rejecting a call Via the instrument cluster Reject Via the iDrive Reject 206 l Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Calls with multiple parties Press the button You can switch between calls and connect two calls to a single conference call These functions must be supported by the mobile phone and Jia the in service provider End call E 5 NNILHe Speak w i i Gb iow i fw anotnet l 1 Telephone This function might have to be activated by the service provider and the mobile phone must be 2 Active calls adjusted accordingly 3 Select an active call If a second call comes in during an active call amp F Active calls you will hear a call waiting signal Accept The call is accepted and the existing call is put v 08912345678 NN on hold 00 10 Hold Stabli g a second call Keypad dialing Establish an additional call during an active call Conference cal Telephone 2 Active calls 3 Hold Entering a phone number laling a number The existing call is put on hold Telephone 1 amp F Active calls 2 Dial number 3 Select the digits individually 4 Select the symbol x v 498912345678 Fa 01 28 Y p 08912 Hold Keypad dialing Conterence cal c eo 2 c e O 4 Dialthe new phone number or select it from a list Active call indicated by a red handset The
96. AUTO program With the AUTO program switched on automatic control of the air volume and air distribution can be adjusted Press the left or right side of the button decrease or increase the intensity The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control Temperature e The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible if necessary with the maximum cooling or heating capacity and then keeps it constant Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature Avoid rapidly switching between different tem perature settings The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature Manual air distribution The air distribution can be adjusted to individual needs L Press the button repeatedly to select a DAS program gt Upper body region gt Upper body region and footwell gt Footwell Air volume manual To be able to manually adjust the air volume switch off the AUTO program first Press the left or right side of the button decrease or increase air volume The selected air volume is shown on the display of the automatic climate control Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Switching the system on off Switching off At the lowest fan speed press the left side of the button on the driver s side Switching on Press any button Maximum cooling Press the button VINE The
97. B flash drives or mobile phones that are supported by the USB audio interface gt Connection via snap in adapter when equip ped with extended connectivity of the music player in the mobile phone Apple iPhone or mobile phones Playback is only possible if no connector is plugged into the USB audio interface Due to the large number of different audio devi ces available on the market it cannot be ensured that every audio device mobile phone is opera ble on the vehicle Ask your service center about suitable audio de vices mobile phones Standard audio files can be played back gt MPs gt WMA gt WAV PCM gt AAC gt Playback lists M3U The USB audio interface is in the center armrest To connect the device use the special cable adapter for the Apple iPod iPhone available from your service center The cable adapter is required for a good connection Use the cable adapter for the Apple iPod iPhone to connect the Apple iPod iPhone with the AUX IN port and the USB interface The Apple iPod iPhone menu structure is Supported by the USB audio inter v s 2 face J Q J z IE The USB audio interface is in the center armrest Connect using a flexible adapter cable to protect the USB audio interface and the USB device against physical damage 193 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 CD multimedia Connect the USB device to the USB interfac
98. Cooling system 237 Corrosion on brake discs 148 Cruise control 114 Cruise control active with stop and go 107 267 oO 1S oO ra oO t 3 aa Everything from A to Z Cruising range 77 Cupholder 142 Curb weight 258 Current fuel consumption 76 Current location storing 156 Customer Relations 219 D Damage tires 230 Damping Control dy namic 102 Data technical 256 Date 76 Daytime running lights 87 Defrosting refer to Windows defrosting 129 Destination guidance 161 Destination guidance with in termediate destinations 160 Destination input naviga tion 154 Detour selecting 167 Digital clock 76 Digital radio 175 Dimensions 256 Dimmable mirrors 59 Direction indicator refer to Turn signals 70 Displacement engine 257 Display instrument clus ter 75 Display in windshield 126 Display lighting refer to Instru ment lighting 89 Displays 14 Displays care 253 Disposal coolant 237 Disposal vehicle battery 244 Distance control refer to PDC 115 Distance selecting for ACC 108 Divided screen view split screen 23 Door lock refer to Remote control 32 268 Doors Automatic Soft Clos ing 38 Drive off assistant 106 Drive off assistant refer to DSC 101 Driving instructions breaking in 146 Driving notes general 146 Driving stability control sys tems 101 Driving tips 146 DSC Dynamic Stability Con trol 101 DTC Dynamic Traction Con trol 101 DVD CD
99. D goes out If Top View is displayed switch on the backup camera via the iDrive refer to page 119 Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display When the distance to an object is small ared bar is shown in front of the vehicle as it is in the PDC display The display appears as soon as Top View is ac tivated If the backup camera image was selected last it again appears on the display To switch to Top View 1 Ry Rear view camera Select the symbol on the Control Display 2 Press the controller 119 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 i The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Display on the Control Display Switching on the backup camera via the iDrive With Top View switched on 1 Ry Rear view camera Select the symbol 2 Press the controller The backup camera image is displayed The set ting is stored for the remote control currently in use Brightness With Top View switched on 1 Select the symbol 2 Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller Contrast With Top View switched on 1 Select the symbol 2 Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller Displaying the turning circle and pathway lines gt The static red turning circle line shows the space needed to the side of the vehicle when the stee
100. Display The automatic detection system is malfunc tioning Activate the status manually Activating deactivating rear axle steering If the status indicating that snow chains are in use is activated the rear axle steering is deacti vated automatically At speeds above 30 mph 50 km h the rear axle steering is activated again even though snow chains are in use 233 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 gt E Engine compartment Engine compartment Important features in the engine compartment 1 Vehicle identification number 4 Jump starting positive terminal 2 Jump starting negative terminal 5 Oil filler neck 3 Washer fluid reservoir 6 Coolant reservoir Hood 1 Pull the lever Opening the hood Working in the engine compartment Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide lines have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center If this work is not carried out properly there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards lt 234 f Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 2 Press the release handle and open the hood ULN 3 Be careful of protruding parts on the hood 4 Danger of injury when the hood is open There is a danger of injury from protruding parts when the hood i
101. I Communication Mobility Reference Lamps Lamps At a glance 1 Rear fog lamps 2 Front fog lamps 25 Automatic headlamp control adaptive light control High beam Assistant welcome lamps Lamps off daytime running lights Parking lamps Low beams welcome lamps N Of f Instrument lighting Parking lamps low beams headlamp control Parking lamps Switch position Q the vehicle lamps light up on all sides e g for parking Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe riods otherwise the battery may become dis charged and it would then be impossible to start the engine When parking it is preferable to switch on the one sided roadside parking lamps refer to page 87 Low beams Switch position ZD with the ignition switched on the low beams light up Welcome lamps When parking the vehicle leave the switch in position ZD or 40 the parking and interior lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un locked Activating deactivating the welcome lamps 1 Settings 2 Lighting 3 Welcome light sce Lighting Pathway light Os O Triple turn signal O Daytime running lamps LY Welcome light The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Headlamp courtesy delay feature The low beams stay lit for a short while after the ignition is switched off if the lamps are switched off and the headlamp flasher is switched on Setting the duration 1
102. LATCH anchors are lo cated behind the seat cover between the back rest and the seat cushion at the marked loca tions Exposing the lower LATCH anchors 1 Reach between the seat cushion and the backrest 2 Detach the seat cover from the Velcro fas tener 62 l Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 3 Pull the seat cover forward Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix ing system pull the belt away from the child re straint fixing system Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing systems without power rear seats 1 Move the seat to its rearmost position 2 For better accessibility tilt the backrest back slightly 3 Fold the leather cover on the seat forward 4 Mountthe child restraint fixing system refer to the operating instructions of the system 5 Make sure that both lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child re straint fixing system is resting snugly against the backrest 6 After mounting the system move the back rest back up slightly so that the child re straint fixing system rests against the back rest Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing systems on power rear seats 1 Before mounting adjust the seats to their basic position refer to page 53 2 Mountthe child restraint fixing system refer to the operating instructions of the system 3 Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop erly connected Child restraint fixing system
103. N This product contains copyrighted technology that is based on multiple registered US patents and the intellectual property of the Macrovision Corporation and other manufacturers The use of this copy protection must be approved by Macrovision Media protected by this product unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision may only be used for private purposes Copying of this technology is prohibited Music collection Storing music General information Music tracks from CDs DVDs and USB devices can be stored in the music collection on a hard disc in the vehicle and played from there gt Audio CD tracks are converted into a com pressed audio format If available informa tion on the album such as the artist is stored as well gt CD DVD or USB device with compressed audio files the entire content of the CD DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as an album The WMA MP3 and AAC formats are stored Individual tracks and directories 187 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 c e3 ge Pi ba cc c LLI CD multimedia can be deleted later Deleting a track and di rectory refer to page 191 Tracks with DRM copy protection can be stored but cannot be played back Backing up music data Regularly back up the music data other wise it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard disk lt r Music recognition technology and re lated data are provided by Graceno
104. Notes At a glance 12 Cockpit 19 iDrive 25 Voice activation system 27 Integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle Controls 32 Opening and closing 48 Adjusting 61 Transporting children safely 65 Driving 75 Displays 86 Lamps 90 Safety 101 Driving stability control systems 107 Driving comfort 128 Climate control 134 Interior equipment 140 Storage compartments Driving tips 146 Things to remember when driving Navigation 154 Navigation Entertainment 172 Tone 174 Radio 181 CD multimedia 196 Rear entertainment Communication 204 213 216 Telephone Contacts BMW Assist Mobility 224 226 227 234 236 238 240 246 251 Refueling Fuel Wheels and tires Engine compartment Engine oil Maintenance Replacing components Breakdown assistance Care Reference 256 259 266 Technical data Short commands for voice activation system Everything from A to Z Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 At a glance Controls Q Ez D ce d m Entertainment Navigation Communication Mobility eb S eb da oD Ge 0 ad Notes Notes Using this Owner s Manual The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic is by using the index An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter Additional sources of information Should you have any questions your service center will be glad to advise you at any t
105. O km eal O O Driving tips Navigation Communication Entertainment Mobility S co Ge 0 ad 225 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f Fuel Fuel Fuel quality Refuel with unleaded fuel only Do not use leaded fuel as this would per manently damage the catalytic converter Do not refuel with ethanol Do not refuel with E85 i e fuel with an ethanol content of 85 or with Flex Fuel as this would damage the engine and fuel supply sys tem lt Required fuel Super Premium Gasoline AKI 91 or AKI 89 BMW recommends AKI 91 or 89 Gasoline with lower AKI The minimum AKI Rating is 89 If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat ing the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures This has no effect on the engine life Minimum fuel grade Do not use any gasoline below the mini mum specified fuel grade otherwise engine damage may occur lt Use high quality brands Field experience has indicated significant differ ences in fuel quality volatility composition ad ditives etc among gasolines offered for sale in the United States and Canada Fuels containing up to and including 10 etha nol or other oxygenates with up to 2 8 oxygen by weight that is 15 MTBE or 3 methanol plus an equivalent amount of co solvent will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materia
106. Onboard info the values can be reset as often as necessary gt Trip computer the values provide an over view of the current trip 1 Vehicle Info 2 Trip computer 3 Vehicle Info 1 a Quick reference Search by pictures Owner s Manual Onboard info Trip computer Vehicle status A O pur e 3 Reset all values are reset Automatically reset all values are reset approx 4 hours after the vehicle comes to a standstill fs Trip computer 17 26 Depart 1 54 std Duration 118 km Distance 12 4 1 100 km Cons 65 2 km h Speed Display on the Control Display Display the computer or trip computer on the Control Display Vehicle Info 2 Onboard info or Trip computer 1 Vehicle Info 2 Onboard info 79 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 3 Cons or Speed E Onboard info 4 535km Range 342 km To dest 02 45 Arrival 16 51 100km Cons 70 9 km h Speed 4 Yes Settings on the Control Display Time Setting the time 1 Settings 2 Time Date 1803 Settings Time Date Tone Speed Climate Lighting Door locks ri Time Date Time 09 30 Format 24h Date 27 05 2012 tt mm ji Format 4 Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed 5 Press the controller 80 6 Turnthe controller until the desired minutes are displayed 7 Press the controller The time i
107. Owner s Manual for Vehicle The Ultimate Driving Machine N zi h i 2 mi wi m 535 Owner s Manual for Vehicle 550i Thank you for choosing a BMW The more familiar you are with your vehicle the better control you will have on the road We therefore strongly suggest Read this Owner s Manual before starting off in your new BMW Also use the integrated Owner s Manual in your vehicle It con tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and road safety and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro chures in the onboard literature We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive BMW AG BMW recommends GCastrol Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 2010 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich Germany Reprinting including excerpts only with the written consent of BMW AG Munich English III 10 03 10 500 Printed on environmentally friendly paper bleached without chlorine suitable for recycling Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Contents The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic or item is by using the index refer to page 266 Using this Owner s Manual 6
108. Request Service status 3 If necessary OK The BMW Search home page is displayed Using BMW Search To start a search gt Turn the controller to highlight an element gt Press the controller to display an element m ee a Va Ji A TRO eTarT ncz i 1 Open Options 2 Display start page Options a Switch off control display Current page Display start page Reload Cancel loading BMW Search ading a new page 1 Open Options 2 Reload 1 Open Options 2 Cancel loading Customer Relations At a glance Contact Customer Relations for information on all aspects of your vehicle Calling Customer Relations 1 BMW Assist 2 Customer Relations The Customer Relations phone number is dis played If the mobile phone is paired a con nection is established to Customer Relations Customer Relations Please call this number Sy 08912345678 1 BMW Assist 2 Customer Relations 3 Start service Service Request At a glance Sends information to your service partner to re quest the arrangement of a service appoint ment The TeleService data is transmitted dur ing a Service Request If possible your service partner will establish contact with you c 2 _ n 9 o amp Starting a Service Request 1 BMW Assist 2 Service Request 219 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 BMW Assist 3 S
109. Theft protection refer to Cen tral locking system 35 Thermal camera refer to Night Vision 123 Thigh support 48 Through loading system 137 Tilt alarm sensor 43 Tilt seats 48 Tire age 231 Tire damage 230 Tire identification marks 229 Tire inflation pressure 227 Tire inflation pressure monitor refer to FTM 95 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 92 Tires changing 231 Tires everything on wheels and tires 227 Tires flat tire 244 Tires run flat tires 232 Tire tread 230 Toll roads route 162 213 oO Oo oO ra oO C oO aa Everything from A to Z Tone 172 Tool kit 240 Tools 240 Top View 118 Torque engine 257 Total vehicle weight 258 Tow fitting 248 Towing 248 Town city navigation 154 Tow starting 248 Tow truck 250 TPM Tire Pressure Moni tor 92 Traction control 101 TRACTION program Dynamic Driving Control 104 Traffic bulletins naviga tion 165 Traffic obstruction bypass Ing 167 Traffic situation gray card 166 Transmission automatic 72 Transporting children safely 61 Tread tires 230 Treble tone 172 Trip computer 79 Triple turn signal activa tion 70 Trip odometer 75 Truck for tow starting tow ing 250 Trunk 137 Trunk cover 137 Trunk expanding 137 Trunk lid 38 Trunk lid automatic 39 Trunk lid emergency unlock ing 41 Trunk lid hotel function 41 Trunk lid via remote con trol 36 Trunk partition 138 Trunk storage compart ments 143 Turnin
110. To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long term calibrate the front seats when a 92 corresponding message appears on the Control Display Calibrating the front seats A corresponding message appears on the Con trol Display 1 Move the respective seat forward all the way 2 Move the respective seat forward again It moves forward briefly 3 Readjust the seat to the desired position The calibration procedure is completed when the message on the Control Display disappears Ifthe message continues to be displayed repeat the calibration If the message does not disappear after a repeat calibration have the system checked as soon as possible Unobstructed area of movement Ensure that the area of movement of the seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or damage to objects Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The concept Monitoring of the tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires The system notifies you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires Conditions for operation The system must have been reset when the in flation pressure was correct otherwise reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pres sure and after every tire or wheel change System limits yn Sudden tire damage Online Edition for Part no
111. Wheel change 243 Wheels changing 231 Wheels everything on wheels and tires 227 Wheels Flat Tire Monitor FTM 95 Wheels Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 92 Width with mirrors vehi cle 256 Width without mirrors vehi cle 256 Window defroster rear 130 Windows powered 44 Windshield climate con trol 147 Windshield washer fluid 72 Windshield washer noz zles 71 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Windshield washer sys v O tem 70 Windshield wiper 70 D Windshield wipers fold out os position 72 x Winter storage care 253 Winter tires suitable tires 231 Winter tires tread 230 Wiper blades replacing 240 Wiper fluid 72 8 Wiper system 70 Wood care 252 Word match concept naviga wn tion 24 Wrench 240 2 2 X a Xenon headlamps bulb re placement 241 Y Your individual vehicle 6 NEW ter Ldteyal Q z 5 T e LLI Communication Mobility Reference 275 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f More about BMW bmwusa com Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 The Ultimate Driving Machine 01 41 2604 413 ue
112. able rear backrests manual gt Vu Pull the lever The backrest folds forward Fold the backrest back the backrest engages in an upright position Pull the lever again to adjust the backrest to the desired angle Locking the backrests Before letting passengers ride in the rear engage the seat backrests locking them in place Otherwise there is the danger of an ac cident due to unexpected seat movement lt Foldable rear backrests powered 1 Fold backrest forward 2 Loading position 3 Basic position Fold backrest forward Move the front seats to an upright position Before folding down the rear backrests ensure that the front seats are moved forward slightly and are in an upright position Other wise the head restraint and screen could be damaged lt Press the button until the backrest is folded all the way forward Folding the backrest back Before anyone can be transported in the rear 1 Put the rear seat backrests into their stand ard position 2 For the best possible individual seat posi tion adjust the inclination of the rear seat backrest if necessary Adjust the standard position of the rear seat backrest Before transporting anyone in the rear and ad justing the individual seat position adjust the standard position of the rear seat backrests Otherwise the restraining effect of the seats can be limited in an accident because the backrest position is set too steep lt L
113. ack Because of the aluminum roof magnetic roof mounted luggage racks cannot be mounted Loading Because roof racks raise the vehicle s center of gravity when loaded they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response Therefore note the following when loading and driving gt Donot exceed the approved roof axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight refer to page 258 Distribute the roof load uniformly The roof load should not be too large in area gt Always load the heaviest pieces on the bot tom gt Fasten roof mounted cargo correctly and securely gt Do not let objects project into the opening path of the tailgate gt Drive smoothly Avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers Take corners gen tly 150 Saving fuel General information Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis sions Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif ferent factors The implementation of certain measures driv ing style and regular maintenance refer to page 238 can have an influence on fuel con sumption and on the environmental impact Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption Remove attached parts following use Remove auxiliary mirrors roof or rear luggage racks which are no longer required following use Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero dynamics and increase the fuel consumptio
114. ack up otherwise inju ries may result Ensure that the lock is securely engaged When folding back the backrest be sure that it locks in place securely If it is not properly engaged transported cargo could enter the passenger compartment during braking or eva sive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occu pants lt Loading position To expand the trunk the cargo cover can be moved into a vertical position 1 Move the rear backrest to the loading posi tion refer to page 138 139 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Storage compartments Storage compartments Storage compartments The following storage compartments are avail able in the vehicle interior gt Glove compartment on the driver s and front passenger side refer to page 140 gt Storage compartmentin the center console refer to page 142 gt Storage compartmentin the center armrest refer to page 141 in the front and rear Compartments in the doors gt Pockets on the backrests of the front seats gt Net in the front passenger footwell No loose objects in the passenger com partment Do not stow any objects in the passenger com partment without securing them otherwise they may present a danger to occupants for in stance during braking and avoidance maneu vers lt Glove compartment Front passenger side Opening amp 4 Pull the handle The light in the glove compartment switches on
115. adjusting the tempera ture arrows 1 Toward blue colder Toward red warmer gt Lever for changing the air flow direction ar row 2 gt Thumb wheels for opening and closing the vents continuously arrows 3 Lateral ventilation A Thumb wheel for opening and closing the vents continuously arrow At a glance Ly e Le p e O Driving tips AE rs lacey al Ofeyralaalelalcershatelal Entertainment Mobility o oO o pes oO Tajemn o aa Climate control Rear automatic climate control Ata glance _ _ 1 ZJ 45 6 031 mem luns d Ar o a J AJTO Temperature AUTO program Vent settings Air volume AUTO intensity Display Maximum cooling Seat heating 53 Active seat ventilation 53 ONOAORWOND G Switching the rear automatic climate control on off 1 Settings 2 Climate 3 Rear climate control The rear automatic climate control is not opera tional if the automatic climate control is switched off or if the function for defrosting or defogging the windows is active AUTO program Press the button Air volume air distribution and tempera ture are controlled automatically Depending on the selected temperature AUTO intensity and outside influences the air is di rected to the upper body and into the footwell The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program 132 Intensity of the
116. air volume 129 Manual brake refer to Parking brake 66 Manual mode transmis sion 73 Manual operation backup camera 120 Manual operation door lock 38 Manual operation exterior mir rors 58 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Manual operation fuel filler flap 224 Manual operation Park Dis tance Control PDC 116 Manual operation parking brake 67 Manual operation Side View 122 Manual operation Top View 119 Map destination entry 158 Map in split screen 164 Map view 164 Marking on approved tires 231 Marking run flat tires 232 Massage seat front 50 Master key refer to Remote control 32 Maximum cooling 129 Maximum speed display 84 Maximum speed winter tires 231 Measure units of 81 Medical kit 247 Memory for seat mirrors steering wheel 57 Menu in instrument clus ter 77 Menus operating iDrive 19 Menus refer to iDrive operat ing concept 20 Message list traffic bulle tins 165 Microfilter 130 Minimum tread tires 230 Mirror 58 Mirror memory 57 Mobile communication devi ces in the vehicle 147 Mobile phone 204 Modifications technical refer to Safety 6 Moisture in headlamp 241 Monitor refer to Control Dis play 19 Mounting of child restraint fix ing systems 61 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 MP3 player 192 Multi function hook 143 Multifunction steering wheel buttons 12 Multimedia 181 Music collection 187 Mus
117. alculated so that you travel through the traffic obstruction Activating dynamic destination guidance 1 Navigation 2 Open Options 3 Dynamic guidance Route Different views of the route are available during destination guidance gt Arrow view in the instrument cluster and on the Control Display List of streets and towns cities gt Map view refer to page 164 Arrow display on the Head Up Display re fer to page 126 Arrow view The following information is displayed during destination guidance gt Large arrow current direction of travel gt Small arrow indicator of next change in di rection Intersection view Lane information Traffic bulletins Distance to next change in direction VV VV OV Street name at next change in direction Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Displaying a list of streets or towns cities on the route When destination guidance is started a list of the streets and towns cities on the route is dis played The driving distances and traffic bulle tins are displayed for each route section 1 Navigation 2 Route information 3 Highlight a section With the Professional navigation system The route section is displayed on the split screen Bypassing a section of the route Calculate a new route for a route section 1 Navigation 2 Route information 3 New route for Cs Route information f New route for
118. am Assistant Parking lamps headlamp control Active Cruise Control Vehicle detection Active Cruise Control Cruise control Lane departure warning DSC Dynamic Stability Control DSC Dynamic Stability Control or DTC Dynamic Traction Control Tire Pressure Monitor Flat Tire Monitor Safety belts Airbag system Symbol Function or system Steering system Y O ac D aed lt Engine functions 0g Brake system w x A m Brake system in Canadian models Antilock Brake System ABS gt gJ oN Antilock Brake System ABS in Cana dian models 6 Text messages Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps Supplementary text messages Additional information on the Control Display e g on the cause of a malfunction or the re quired action can be called up via Check Con trol refer to page 83 The text of urgent messages is displayed auto matically 15 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Instrument cluster electronic displays Cockpi Symbols and messages e g warnings 14 5 Selection list e g radio 77 Range 77 6 Transmission displays 74 Computer 78 A ON Navigation display 154 Service display 82 16 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 All around the center console O be te
119. and illuminates the outside of the curve Self leveling headlights The self leveling headlights feature adapts the light distribution to the contours of the road The light distribution is lowered on hilltops to avoid blinding oncoming traffic and raised in de pressions to increase visibility Malfunction A message is displayed Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has failed Have the system checked as soon as pos sible High beam assistant The concept When the lights are switched on this system automatically switches the high beams on and off The procedure is controlled by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror The as sistant ensures that the high beams are switched on whenever the traffic situation al lows The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual Activating the high beam assistant 88 1 Turn the light switch to ZD or 40 2 Press the button on the turn signal lever ar row A The indicator lamp in the instrument 4 cluster lights up When the lights are switched on the high beams are switched on and off automati cally The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you and to ad equate illumination e g in towns and cities Switching the high beams on and off manually gt High beams on arrow 1 gt High beams off headlamp flasher arrow 2 Toreactivate the high beam assistant p
120. ar end collision with a certain severity the active head restraint automatically reduces the distance from the head Reduced protective function gt Do not use seat or head restraint cov ers gt Do not hang objects e g clothes hangers on the head restraints gt Do not attach accessories to the seat or head restraint Otherwise the protective function of the active head restraint will be impaired and the personal safety of the occupants will be endangered lt Adjusting the height manual head restraints C 2 Da Jad e O gt To raise pull gt To lower press the button arrow 1 and push the head restraint down Adjusting the height power head restraints Adjusting electrically Distance to the back of the head manual head restraints gt Forward pull gt Back press the button and push the head restraint toward the rear 55 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Adjusting Distance to the back of the head power head restraints The head restraint is automatically repositioned when the shoulder support is adjusted refer to page 50 Adjusting the side extensions Fold forward for increased lateral support in the resting position Removing The head restraints cannot be removed Rear head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the
121. art no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Beverage holder cu pholder 142 Blinds sun protection 45 Bluetooth connection activat ing deactivating 205 BMW Assist 216 BMW EfficientDynamics refer to Saving fuel 150 BMW homepage 6 BMW Internet page 6 BMW Maintenance Sys tem 238 BMW Search 218 Bottle holder refer to Cu pholder 142 Brake assistant 101 Brake assistant adaptive 101 Brake discs breaking in 146 Brake force display 100 Brake lamps brake force dis play 100 Brake lamps bulb replace ment 242 Brake lights adaptive 100 Brake pads breaking in 146 Braking notes 147 Breakdown assis tance 246 247 Breaking in 146 Brightness of Control Dis play 81 Bulb replacement 240 Bulb replacement front 241 Bulb replacement rear 242 Bulbs and lamps 240 Button Start Stop 65 Bypassing see starting aid 247 C California Proposition 65 Warning 7 Camera backup camera 122 Camera care 253 Camera Side View 123 Camera Top View 120 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Can holder refer to Cu pholder 142 Car battery 244 Car care products 252 Care vehicle 252 Cargo 148 Cargo straps securing cargo 149 Car key refer to Remote con trol 32 Carpet care 253 Car wash 251 Catalytic converter refer to Hot exhaust system 146 Category details special des tinations 157 CBS Condition Based Serv ice 238 CD DVD 181 CD DVD player rear 196 CDs storing
122. ay 5 Start the initialization with Reset 6 Drive away The initialization is completed while driving which can be interrupted at any time 95 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Safety The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes Indication of a flat tire The yellow warning lamp and the vehicle symbol light up A message appears on the Control Display In addition a signal sounds There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure 1 Reduce your speed and stop cautiously Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers 2 Check whether the vehicle is fitted with reg ular tires or run flat tires Run flat tires are labeled with a circular sym bol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall Normal tires 1 Identify the damaged wheel If an identification is not possible please contact the service center 2 Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized In this case initialize the system Run flat tires 1 Carefully reduce your speed to a maximum of 50 mph 80 km h Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h Do not continue driving without run flat tires Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run flat tires continued driv
123. ayed gt gt Transmission of the phone book entries is not yet complete note the display in the sta tus field It may only be possible to transmit the phone book entries on the SIM card or the mobile phone It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high The mobile phone cannot be paired gt Is the mobile phone supported For infor mation contact your service center Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and via iDrive Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter the passkey Repeat the pairing procedure Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone If so delete the con nections with other devices on the mobile phone gt The mobile phone no longer reacts Switch the mobile phone off and on again gt Repeat the pairing procedure If all items on the list have been checked and the mobile phone still cannot be paired please contact Customer Relations Controls Incoming call Receiving calls If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the network the name of the contact is displayed Accepting a call Via the button on the steering wheel Press the button Via the instrument cluster Accept Via the iDrive Accept i SJ Incoming call OOo incoming call g 08912345
124. be car ried in the vehicle It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW It is located in the tool kit under the trunk floor Tow fitting information on use gt Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in gt Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only gt Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting e g do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting Otherwise damage to the tow fitting and the ve hicle can occur 248 l Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Screw thread A Push out the cover by pressing on the arrow symbol Towing General information Light towing vehicle The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed otherwise it will not be possible to control the vehicle re sponse lt Attaching the tow bar tow rope correctly Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage Do not tow when the electronics system has failed Do not tow the vehicle when the electronics sys tem has failed otherwise the electric steering lock cannot be unlocked and the vehicle cannot be steered Observe before towing Vehicle without manual parking lock Transport the vehicle on a loading plat form only If your vehicle is not equipped with a manual parking lock it may not be towed Have the vehicle transported on a loading plat form only o
125. ber from the list Selecting an entry The connection is established Deleting a single entry or all entries 1 Highlight the entry 2 Open Options 3 Delete entry or Delete list 209 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 i Saving an entry in the contacts 1 Highlight the entry 2 Open Options 3 Store as new contact or Add to existing contact 4 Select the type of number Home Business Mobile or Other 5 Complete the entries if necessary 6 If necessary Store contact Messages Display of different messages gt My Info messages from the BMW Assist portal gt Message from the Concierge service refer to page 217 MylInfo Starting destination guidance 1 Select the message 2 Start guidance or Add as another dest Dialing the number in the message 1 Select the message 2 Call Message from the Concierge service Using an address in destination guidance 1 Select the message 2 Start guidance or Add as another dest 1 amp concierge I 442km a Start guidance Deutschland 80788 M nchen Petuelring 130 08912345678 3 Start destination guidance if necessary b S S 5 J q Controls Driving tips NEEL OIA OZA oe pice Mobility eb S eb dam co Ge 0 ad Telephone Dialing the number in the message 1 Select the message 2 Call Storing an addr
126. ble Always protect tires against all contact with oil grease and fuels Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres sure indicated on the side wall of the tire Run flat tires Label RSC label on the tire sidewall The wheels are composed of special rims and tires that are self supporting to a limited de gree 232 The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re main drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a pressure loss Continued driving with damaged tires refer to page 96 Changing run flat tires For your own safety only use run flat tires No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire Your service center will be glad to advise you Snow chains Fine link snow chains Only certain types of fine link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle classified as road safe and recommended Consult your service center for more informa tion Use Use only in pairs on the rear wheels equipped with the same tire size gt 245 50 R 18 gt 245 45R 19 Follow the chain manufacturer s instructions Make sure that the snow chains are always suf ficiently tight Retighten as needed according to the chain manufacturer s instructions Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains as doing so may result in incorrect readings Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains as doing so may result in incorrect rea
127. bol Inthe vehicle the address has not been checked as a destination a In the vehicle the address has been checked as a destination Mobile phone Displaying the detailed view Select the desired contact All fields that have been filled in for that contact are displayed Selecting the name display Names can be displayed in a different order 1 My contacts 2 Highlight the contact 3 Open Options 4 Display last first name or Display first last name Depending on how the contacts were stored on your mobile phone the names may be displayed differently than the display selected Selecting the contact as a navigation destination 1 My contacts 2 Select the desired contact 3 Select the desired address When contacts from the mobile phone are used the address may need to be matched to the nav igation data contained in the vehicle In this case Correct the address Checking the address as a destination An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data con tained in the vehicle The address can be checked for this purpose 1 Select the desired contact and highlight the address 214 2 Open Options 3 Check as destination 4 Correct and store the address if necessary If the address is corrected and stored a copy of it is stored in the vehicle The address is not changed on the mobile phone Dialing phone numbers 1 My contact
128. bulbs Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare hands as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb s surface and reduce its service life Use a clean tissue cloth or something similar or hold the bulb by its base lt Light emitting diodes LEDs Light emitting diodes installed behind a cover serve as the light source for controls display el ements and other equipment Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 These light emitting diodes which are related to conventional lasers are officially designated as Class 1 light emitting diodes Do not remove the covers Do not remove the covers and never stare into the unfiltered light for several hours other wise irritation of the retina could result Headlamp glass Condensation can form on the inside of the ex ternal lamps in cool or humid weather When the light is switched on the condensation evapo rates after a short time The headlamp glasses do not need to be changed If there is a large amount of moisture e g water droplets form in the lamp have it checked by your service center Front lamps bulb replacement At a glance Adaptive light control Parking lamp daytime running lights Low beams high beams mh ON Turn signal Xenon headlamps Because of the long life of these bulbs the like linood of failure is very low Switching the lamps on and off frequently shortens their life Ifax
129. cally heated whenever the ignition is switched on 71 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 A O ed e Iving Dr Fold out position of the wipers Required when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions for example Switch off the ignition 2 Under frosty conditions ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind shield 3 Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx 3 seconds until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position After the wipers are folded back down the wiper system refer to page 70 must be reactivated Fold the wipers back down Before switching the ignition on fold the wipers back down to the windshield otherwise the wipers may become damaged when they are switched on 1 Switch on the ignition 2 Press the wiper levers down The wipers move to their resting position and are ready for operation Washer fluid General information Antifreeze for washer fluid Antifreeze is flammable Therefore keep it away from sources of ignition Only keep it in the closed original container and inaccessible to children Follow the instructions on the container lt Container for washer fluid Adding washer fluid Only add washer fluid when the engine is cool and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts Otherwise there is the danger
130. ch could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the Na tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying BMW of North America LLC P O Box 1227 Westwood New Jersey 07675 1227 Telephone 1 800 831 1117 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or BMW of North America LLC To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safe 8 rcar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about mo tor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety related defect to Transport Canada De fect Investigations and Recalls may telephone the toll free hotline 1 800 333 0510 or contact Transport Canada by mail at Transport Canada ASFAD Place de Ville Tower C 330 Sparks Street Ottawa ON K1A ON5 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 v ue jb e y s 01 Uu09 sd Bulang uonebinen yu wuieyu zuz fuoneviunwwog O O LO O T m O I m qm x lt x O N q lt vr O O Cc
131. cident occurring lt mo 0 Press the button gt If active press twice gt If interrupted press once The displays go out The stored desired speed is deleted Interrupting ere i When active press the button The system is automatically interrupted if gt The brakes are applied gt Transmission position D is disengaged gt DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated gt DSC is actively controlling stability Maintaining storing the current speed SET Press the button When the system is switched on the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly displayed in the instrument cluster Displays in the speedometer refer to page 115 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Change maintain speed Adapting the desired speed Adapt the desired speed to the road con ditions and be ready to brake at all times other wise there is the danger of an accident occur ring lt Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set If active the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear gt Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance the desired speed in creases or decreases by approx 1 mph 1 km h gt Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance the desired speed increas
132. cle s operating life General driving notes Closing the tailgate Drive with the tailgate closed Only operate the vehicle with the tailgate closed otherwise exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment lt If the vehicle must be driven with the tailgate open 1 Close all windows and the glass sunroof 2 Greatly increase the air volume of the auto matic climate control system Hot exhaust system Hot exhaust system High temperatures are generated in the exhaust system Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them When driv ing standing at idle and while parking take care to avoid possible contact between the hot ex haust system and any highly flammable materi als such as hay leaves grass etc Such contact could lead to a fire and with it the risk of serious personal injury as well as property damage Do not touch hot exhaust pipes otherwise there is the danger of getting burned lt Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Climate control windshield ora C a ammo The marked area is not covered with a heat re flective coating Use this area for garage door openers devices for electronic toll collection etc Climate control laminated tinted safety glass The vehicle glass provides full protection against the harmful effects of UV radiation on the skin Mobile communication devices in the vehicle Mobile communication devices in
133. compromise your vehicle s driving stability but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident lt After correcting the tire inflation pressure rein itialize the Flat Tire Monitor After correcting the tire inflation pressure rein itialize the Tire Pressure Monitor Pressure specifications The tire inflation pressure table refer to page 227 contains all pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem perature Pressure specifications apply to ap proved tire sizes and recommended tire brands This information can be obtained from your service center To identify the correct tire inflation pressure please note the following gt Tire sizes of your vehicle gt Vehicle load gt Maximum allowable driving speed Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph 160 km h For speeds of up to 100 mph 160 km h and for optimum driving comfort note the pressure val ues in the tire inflation pressure table refer to page 227 and adjust as necessary These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver s door pillar Maximum permissible speed Do not exceed 100 mph 160 km h other wise tire damage and accidents may result lt Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph 160 km h Tire size Pressure specifica tions in psi kPa Specifications in psi max kilopascal with cold RARE tires Be S_ N F 245 45R1998Y 2 22 32
134. ct liability and strict li ability Some states do not allow the exclu sion or limitation of incidental or consequen tial damages so those particular limitations may not apply to you The traffic information is displayed in the map Switching the reception on off Navigation 2 Open Options Receive Traffic Info Opening the traffic bulletins Navigation 165 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 O S oO gt Z Navigation 2 Map Move the controller to the left A Select the symbol 3 Traffic Info First the traffic bulletins on the planned route are displayed The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order of their distance from the current vehicle posi tion 4 Select a traffic bulletin Select the symbol to obtain additional information Traffic bulletins in the map When the traffic situation gray card is activated the view on the Control Display is switched over to shades of gray This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins The day night mode is dis regarded in this setting Symbols and special destinations are not displayed Navigation Map Open Options Settings eS 2 mp Traffic situation gray map Symbols in the map view Depending on the scale of the map and the lo cation of the traffic obstruction along the route the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis played Additional information in the map
135. cting an external device 1 Fold down the cover in front of the cinch sockets on the CD DVD player 2 Connect the external device to the RCA sockets gt Video yellow socket Audio white and red socket Starting playback 1 CD Multimedia 2 External devices 3 Selectthe A or Ir symbol GF External devices JUKEBOX AUX front AUX left rear AUX right rear Volume The volume of the sound output is dependent on the audio device If this volume differs mark edly from the volume of the other audio sources it is advisable to adjust the volumes Adjusting the volume The volume can only be adjusted if no external video device is connected CD Multimedia External devices Select the or Ir symbol Volume e hy gt GF AUX left rear Audio AUX left rear Volume F 5 Turn the controller until the desired volume is set and press the controller 200 l Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 What to do if gt Only a black screen is visible Switch on the system gt There are no options available on the screen Replace remote control batteries With Professional rear seat entertainment toggle between screens if necessary gt Radio stations or TV channels are grayed out and can not be selected Function is limited due to the selected pri ority Change priority gt The DVD does not play Playback does not begin automatically Start
136. d gt Control options for the selected main menu e g for Radio gt If applicable further operating options for the selected menu e g Store station Changing settings 1 Select a field 2 Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed Volume settings Speed volume Volume setting Gong 3 Press the controller Activating deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check box It indicates whether the function is acti vated or deactivated Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function EY The function is activated EJ The function is deactivated Example setting the clock Setting the clock 1 Kid Press the button The main menu is displayed 2 Turn the controller until Settings is high lighted and then press the controller 1 5 Main menu CD Multimedia Telephone Ba B E s KEK ELASIN Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings A 3 If necessary move the controller to the left to display Time Date 21 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 iDrive 4 Turnthecontroller until Time Date is high lighted and then press the controller o Settings Time Date Language Units Tone Speed Climate Lighting Door locks 5 Turn the controller until Time is high lighted and then press the controller A amp Time Date Time 09 30 Format 24h Date 27
137. d South America New Zealand 5 Northwest Asia North Africa 6 China O All regions Playback The video image is displayed on the front Con trol Display up to a speed of approx 2 mph 3 km h in some countries it is only displayed if the parking brake is set or if the automatic trans mission is in position P DVD video 1 CD Multimedia 2 CD DVD 3 Select a DVD with video content 183 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f 4 BV DVD menu VCD SVCD 1 CD Multimedia 2 CD DVD 3 Select a CD with video content 4 Select track 5 Select the desired track Video menu To open the video menu turn the controller dur ing playback Press the controller when Back is displayed DvD Open the DVD menu gt Start playback I Pause Stop DO Next chapter K Previous chapter gt Fast forward lt Reverse In fast forward reverse the speed increases ev ery time the controller is pressed To stop start playback DVD menu 1 If necessary turn the controller to open the video menu 2 BYP DVD menu At a glance A e ho J e 1S Driving tips AE ELOLA Communication Entertainment Mobility v oO eb pes oO ajem oO a The DVD menuis displayed The display de pends on the contents of the DVD 3 Toselect menu items move the controller and press it To change to the video menu turn the controller and
138. d can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a sub stitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating prop erly The TPMS malfunction indicator is com bined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then re main continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the mal function indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re placement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly FTM Flat Tire Monitor The concept The system detects a pressure loss on
139. d turning circle lines gt Spatially shaped markings can be shown in ks eee the backup camera image 1 Position the vehicle so that the turning circle lines lead to within the limits of the parking space Their colored steps match the markings of the PDC This simplifies estimation of the distance to the object shown Activating the assistance functions More than one assistance function can be active at the same time gm af k l ad amp p MRIAhNAn F p A Aar ly An AA Inac Snowing tne parkll g GiU INIo a 1 Y Parking aid lines Select the symbol 2 Press the controller Pathway and turning circle lines are displayed Cc De P ALAI m Arm t anh eta r A PRA Arin A snowing tne opstacie Mal kin g 1 Pa Obstacle marking Select the symbol 2 Press the controller Spatially shaped markings are displayed 121 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Driving comfort Display on the Control Display Switching on the backup camera via the iDrive With PDC activated 1 Ry Rear view camera Select the symbol 2 Press the controller The backup camera image is displayed The set ting is stored for the remote control currently in use Brightness With the backup camera switched on 1 Select the symbol 2 Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller Contrast With the backup camera switched on 1 Select the symbol
140. dcast can be selected from a list Managing the favorites Activating deactivating the favorites Favorites can be activated and deactivated globally and individually 1 Satellite radio 2 Manage favorites 3 Select Activate alert or the desired favor ites The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Deleting favorites 1 Satellite radio 2 Manage favorites 3 Highlight the desired favorite 4 Open Options 5 Delete entry Traffic Jump Traffic and weather information for a selected region is broadcast every few minutes 179 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 i Selecting a region Radio Satellite radio Open Options Set jump aS pp Select the desired region The region is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Activating deactivating the jump 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 A Jump to Information for the selected region is broadcast as soon as it is available A new panel opens Canceling the Traffic Jump Cancel Information will be broadcast shortly LY Information is currently being broad cast Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic Jump Automatic update About twice a year Sirius performs an update of the channel names and positions The update takes place automatically and may take several minutes Notes gt Reception may not be available in some sit uations such as u
141. dings When driving with snow chains briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control if necessary Maximum speed with snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph 50 km h when using snow chains Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Snow chain detection The concept When using snow chains you should set whether you are driving with or without snow chains via the iDrive The snow chain detection system supports you by automatically showing the detected state on the Control Display When snow chains are in use the rear axle steer ing of the Integral Active Steering is deacti vated automatically At speeds above the maximum allowable speed with snow chains of 30 mph 50 km h the rear axle steering is activated again automatically Activating the status 1 Settings 2 Tire chains 3 Tire chains installed Automatic detection If functioning properly gt Snow chains are mounted The setting is not activated J After you drive a short distance the mes sage is shown on the Control Display and the status is activated automatically Confirm the automatic activation gt Snow chains are not mounted The setting is activated FY At speeds above 30 mph 50 km h a warning lamp lights up and a message is displayed Deactivate the status manually If not functioning properly gt Snow chains are mounted The setting is not activated DO A message does not appear on the Control
142. displayed Communication Entertainment 2 Display Owner s Manual Page by page without link access 3 Select the desired page in the Owner s Man Leaf through the pages directly while skipping the links Highlight the symbol once Now simply press 4 Press the button again to return to the the controller to leaf from page to page function displayed last Leaf back 5 iil Press the button to return to the page of the Owner s Manual displayed last Y O D 2 O aa 27 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f Integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle To switch back and forth repeatedly between the function displayed last and the page of the Owner s Manual displayed last repeat steps 4 and 5 This opens a new panel every time Programmable memory buttons General information The Owner s Manual can be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons refer to page 23 and called up directly Storing 1 Select Owner s Manual via the iDrive 2 g Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds Executing Press the button The Owner s Manual is displayed im mediately 28 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 v uejp e lV 01 U05 sd ulang uonebinen yu wuieyu zuz fuoneviunwwog 29 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with informatio
143. dition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 i The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Roadside parking lamps The vehicle can be illuminated on one side Switching on With the ignition switched off press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx 2 seconds Switching off Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction Adaptive light control The concept Adaptive light control is a variable headlamp control system that enables dynamic illumina tion of the road surface Depending on the steering angle and other pa rameters the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road In tight curves such as on mountainous roads or when turning turning lamps that light up the inside area of the curve are switched on at speeds up to approx 70 km h approx 44 mph Controls Activating Switch position 2 with the ignition switched on e5 S amp O me lt Controls Driving tips NEW EL OIA Communication Entertainment Y O D D t x Lamps The turning lamps are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals To avoid blinding oncoming traffic the adaptive light control directs light towards the front pas senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill When driving in reverse only the turning lamp is active
144. dividual specifications Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 After the sport program is activated select Configure SPORT mode on the displayed panel and configure the program Optionally the sport program can be configured before it is activated 1 Settings 2 SPORT mode I Settings Speed Climate Lighting Door locks SPORT mode Profiles Allow rear control 3 Configure the program This configuration is retrieved when the sport program is activated NORMAL For a balanced tuning with maximum driving sta bilization Activating NORMAL E Press the button repeatedly until the program display in the tachometer goes out In certain situations the system automatically changes to the NORMAL program automatic program change refer to page 103 COMFORT Comfort oriented tuning of the shock absorbers for optimal traveling comfort with maximum driving stabilization Activating COMFORT ay Press the button repeatedly until COM FORT appears in the tachometer 105 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f Displays in the instrument cluster Selected program The selected program is dis played in the tachometer ae Program selection Pressing the button displays a list of the select able programs Display on the Control Display Program changes can be displayed briefly on the Control Display To do so make the following settings 1
145. dly 186 Audio playback The audio track of a DVD can be played back even if video playback is not possible in the ve hicle Only the main film without the previews or extras can be played back Starting playback A DVD is located in the DVD changer 1 CD Multimedia 2 CD DVD 3 Select the desired DVD Selecting a chapter using the button Press the button repeatedly until the desired chapter is played lt I gt Selecting a chapter using iDrive 1 CD Multimedia 2 CD DVD 3 Select the desired DVD 4 Select the desired chapter Fast forward reverse lt gt Press and hold the button Selecting the language The languages that are available depend on the DVD CD Multimedia CD DVD Select the desired DVD Open Options Audio language aP ey NMS Select the desired language Notes CD DVD player and changer yn Do not remove the cover Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 BMW CD DVD players and changers are offi cially designated Class 1 laser products Do not operate if the cover is damaged otherwise se vere eye damage may occur CDs and DVDs Use of CDs DVDs gt Do not use self recorded CDs DVDs with labels applied as these can be come detached during playback due to heat buildup and can cause irrepar able damage to the device gt Only use round CDs DVDs with a standard diameter of 4 7 in 12 cm and do not play CDs DVDs with an adapter
146. driver s side is an OBD socket for check ing the primary components in the vehicle emis sions Emissions values service amp The warning lamp lights up ENGINE o SOON The emissions values are deterio rating Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible gt Thewarning lamp flashes under cer tain circumstances Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately otherwise serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control compo nents in particular the catalytic con verter Fuel filler cap The indicator lamp lights up If the fuel cap is not properly tightened the OBD system may conclude that fuel vapor is escaping If the cap is then tightened the display should go out in a short time Data memory Your vehicle records data relating to vehicle op eration faults and user settings These data are stored in the remote control and can be read out with suitable devices particularly when the ve hicle is serviced The data obtained in this way provide valuable information for service proc esses and repair or for optimizing and develop ing vehicle functions further In addition if you signed a service contract for Assist certain ve hicle data can be sent directly from the vehicle to facilitate the desired services gt
147. e After connecting for the first time Information on all music tracks e g artist or type of music as well as playback lists are transmit ted into the vehicle This may take some time depending on the USB device and the number of tracks During transmission the tracks can be called up via the file directory Number of tracks Information from up to four USB devices or for approx 16 000 tracks can be stored in the ve hicle If a fifth device is connected or if more than 16 000 tracks are stored information on exist ing tracks may be deleted Copy protection Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man agement DRM cannot be played Playback 1 CD Multimedia 2 External devices 3 Select the symbol GF External devices JUKEBOX Not active The playback starts with the first track When an Apple iPhone is connected via the snap in adapter and an audio device is con nected to the AUX IN port at the same time the audio signal of the AUX IN port is played On the Splitscreen the CD cover for the music track might be displayed after a few seconds Track search Selection is possible via gt Playback lists gt Information type of music artist album track gt Additionally for USB devices file directory composer Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in the Latin alphabet Starting the track search 1 CD Multimedia 2 External devices 3 0 Select the
148. e Active Cruise Control that prompts the driver to intervene or brake Display The collision warning can be issued in the in strument cluster in the Head up Display and acoustically Instrument cluster The vehicle lights up in red prewarning The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds acute warning You are requested to intervene by brak ing or making an evasive maneuver Adapting your speed and driving style i O J O O The display does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions lt System limits Be alert Due to system limitations warnings may be not be issued at all or may be issued late or improperly Therefore always be alert and ready to intervene otherwise there is the danger of an accident occurring Detection range The detection capacity of the radar sensor and the collision warning has limitations This may result in the warning not being issued or being issued late For example the following situations may not be detected gt Slow moving objects when you approach them at high speed gt Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of your vehicle gt Two wheeled vehicles ahead of you Pedestrians Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations gt In heavy fog rain or snowfall gt In tight curves gt Ifthe radar sensor is dirty
149. e Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Entering the postal code 1 Select Town City Postal Code or the dis played town city 2 1 Select the symbol 3 Select the numbers 4 Change to thelist of postal codes and towns cities 5 Highlight the postal code With the Professional navigation system A preview map Is displayed on the split screen 6 Select the postal code Entering a street and intersection 1 Select Street or the displayed street 2 Enter a street and intersection in the same way as you would enter a town city If there are several streets with the same name 1 Change to the list of street names 2 Highlight the street With the Professional navigation system A preview map Is displayed on the split screen 3 Select the street Alternative enter the street address and house number Select Street or the displayed street Enter the street as you would the town city House number Select the numbers Change to the list of house numbers os sa SYS Select a house number or range of house numbers Entering a street without a destination town city All streets of the selected state province are of fered The associated town city is displayed af ter the street name The desired street does not exist in the specified city town because it belongs to another part of the city town 155 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f Navigation E
150. e large tailgate Note the opening height of the large tail gate The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when the large tailgate opens otherwise damage may result Adjust the opening height of the large tailgate according to the given situation lt The large tailgate opens automatically to the ad justed opening height gt Press the button on the exterior of the tail gate arrow 2 gt Press the button on the remote 40 control for approx 1 second andre lease Pressing the button again stops the motion The opening process is interrupted as well gt When the vehicle starts moving gt Bypressing the button in the driver s foot well gt Bypressing the button on the inside of the tailgate Opening the large tailgate further yoo Press and hold the button on the inside of the large tailgate arrow 2 to open the large tailgate to the maximum opening height Releasing the button stops the motion Closing the large tailgate oo gt Press the button arrow 1 on the inside of the large tailgate The tailgate closes automatically Pressing again stops the motion Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 p D gt With Comfort Access Press the button on the open tailgate Tailgate closes automatically and the vehi cle is locked gt Press the button on the exterior of the tail ga
151. e phone book Redialing Displaying accepted calls Dialing a phone number List of messages Call up Bluetooth devices gt Telephone Phonebook Redial Received calls Dial number Messages Bluetooth Navigation General information Navigation menu Opening the destination input Entering the address Opening destination guidance Starting destination guidance Terminating destination guidance Opening the home address Opening the route criteria Opening the route Switching on the spoken instructions Repeating a spoken instruction Switching off the spoken instructions Displaying the address book Displaying the last destinations Opening the traffic bulletins Special destinations Navigation lt gt Enter address Enter address Guidance gt Start guidances Stop guidance gt Home address Route preference Route information Switch on voice instructions Repeat voice instructions Switch off voice instructions Address book Last destinations lt gt Traffic Infos Points of interest 262 l Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Map Displaying the map Map facing north Map in the direction of travel Perspective map Automatic scaling of the map Scale feet Scale miles gt Map lt gt Map facing north gt Map in direction of travek Map perspective view Map with automatic scaling lt Map scale f
152. e rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat Transporting children in the rear Only transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft 150 cm in the rear in child restraint fixing systems provided in accordance with the age weight and size of the child otherwise there is an increased risk of in jury in an accident Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint fixing system can no longer be used due to their age weight and size lt Children on the front passenger seat Should it ever be necessary to use a child re straint fixing system in the front passenger seat make sure that the front knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated Au tomatic deactivation of front passenger airbags refer to page 91 Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in the front passenger seat the front passenger airbags must be deactivated otherwise there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered even with a child restraint fixing system lt Installing child restraint fixing systems Before mounting Before mounting a child restraint fixing system on the rear middle seat return both outer backr ests to the basic position Notes Manufacturer s information for child re straint fixing systems To select mount and u
153. ection in which the button is pressed Saving positions Seat mirror and steering wheel memory refer to page 57 Adjusting manually If an electrical malfunction occurs for example press the edges of the mirror glass 58 l Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Automatic Curb Monitor When the reverse gear is engaged the mirror glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas senger side This improves your view of the curb and other low lying obstacles when parking for example Activating 1 aa Slide the mirror changeover switch to the driver s mirror position 2 Engage transmission position R Deactivating Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas senger s mirror position Fold in and out a Press the button Possible up to approx 15 mph 20 km h For example this is advantageous gt Incar washes gt In narrow streets gt For folding back mirrors that were folded away manually Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto matically at a speed of approx 25 mph 40 km h Fold in the mirror in a car wash Before entering an automatic car wash fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button otherwise they could be damaged de pending on the width of the vehicle Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running Interior rearview mirror Reducing the blinding effect i O m J
154. ed secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle Cover sharp edges and corners gt If necessary fold down the rear backrests including the trunk partition to stow cargo 149 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 i Securing cargo gt Smaller and lighter items secure with re taining straps a trunk net or draw straps gt Larger and heavy objects secure with cargo straps Cargo straps can be attached to four lashing eyes located in the trunk Securing cargo Always position and secure the cargo as described above otherwise it can endanger the car s occupants if sudden braking or swerving becomes necessary Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car otherwise they could be thrown around as a result of hard braking sud den swerves etc and endanger the occu pants lt Roof mounted luggage rack Special rack system as optional accessory A special rack system is available as an optional accessory Follow the directions given in the installation in structions At a glance v e pes e O Driving tips Navigation fOfeypntaalelalcershulelal Entertainment v 0 i g O as Things to remember when driving Anchorage points NX Fold the cover outward Mounting Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for raising and opening the glass sunroof Magnetic roof mounted luggage r
155. ed on A still image is displayed at regular intervals for a fraction of a second Night Vision with pedestrian detection is not available on the rear screen Pedestrian detection Environmental influences can limit the availabil ity of pedestrian detection If pedestrian detec tion is not available a symbol is displayed in the heat image This symbol disappears when the function be comes available again The pedestrian detection and warning system only operates in darkness and only when a heat image is displayed Adjustments via the iDrive With Night Vision switched on 1 Activate Night Vision with pedestrian detec tion 2 Press the controller 3 Open the desired menu item gt 1 Brightness gt 2 Contrast gt 3 Pedestrian detection The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use 125 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 ki O mn had O O Driving comfort Camera Rain dirt snow or ice can impair camera oper ation The camera is automatically heated when the external temperatures are low The camera is automatically cleaned together with the headlamps Clean the lens refer to page 253 Head up Display The concept This system projects important information into the driver s field of vision e g the speed In this way the driver can get information with out averting his or her eyes from the road Displa
156. eet Map scale miles e g map scale 5 miles Split screen settings Split screen Switching off the split screen Adapting the split screen Split screen map facing north Split screen current position Split screen direction of travel Split screen perspective Split screen wider intersection zoom Split screen scale feet Split screen scale miles Split screen highlighting traffic bulletins Split screen computer Split screen trip computer Automatically scaling the split screen Switch on splitscreen gt Turn off split screen Split screen content Split screen map facing north Split screen current position Split screen map in direction of travelk Split screen perspective Splitscreen Exit ramp view Split screen scale feet e g split screen scale 100 feet Split screen scale miles e g split screen scale 5 miles Split screen Traffic conditions Split screen on board info lt Splitscreen trip computer Split screen automatic scaling lt 263 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f At a glance A O ho a e Driving tips Entertainment Navigation Communication Mobility cD S G cc Sen 03 Gea 0 X Short commands for voice activation system Destination guidance with intermediate destinations New destination entry Enter address Trip list Stored trips C
157. eiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC Federal Communication Commission regulations Operation is governed by the following FCC ID gt OAYARS3 A Compliance statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions gt This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and gt this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation 112 Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Collision warning with braking function The concept The system issues a two phase warning of a danger of collision at speeds above approx 10 mph 15 km h The collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated It responds to stationary or moving objects that are within the detection range of the radar sys tem When the vehicle is intentionally brought into contact with an object the collision warning is delayed to avoid false warnings Warning stages Prewarning This warning is issued for example when there is the impending danger of a collision or the dis tance to the vehicle ahead is too small Acute warning with braking function Warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at a relatively high differential speed The acute warning prompts the driver to inte
158. elephone 2 Bluetooth telephone 3 Add new phone Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played 9 Bluetooth telephone Configuration of Bluetooth telephone services Add new phone Handy 1 Handy 2 Handy 3 Connected Paired 4 To perform additional steps on the mobile phone refer to the mobile phone operating instructions for instance search for or con nect the Bluetooth device or a new device The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display 5 Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display You are prompted by the iDrive or mobile phone to enter the same Bluetooth passkey 6 Enter the passkey and confirm Enter same passkey for vehicle and Bluetooth phone If the pairing was successful the mobile phone appears at the top of the list of mobile phones Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve hicle at once If pairing was unsuccessful what to do if refer to page 206 Following the initial pairing gt The mobile phone is detected connected in the vehicle within 2 minutes if the engine is running or the ignition is switched on gt After they have been identified phone book entries are transferred from the SIM card and or mobile phone to the vehicle this de pends on the mobile phone gt Four mobile phones can be paired Specific settings may be necessary
159. elephone 204 Y O a D lt 12 Steering column stalk right aad 2 EP D 3 O a A L gt hee NI Windshield wipers 70 Rain sensor 71 Clean the windshields and head lamps 70 Start stop the engine and switch the ignition on off 65 Steering wheel heating 60 Adjust the steering wheel 60 Open the tailgate 39 18 Unlock the hood 13 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Instrument cluster Cockpi DTC PARK a O OFF AUTOH gt H 358 mls Mo 00 a ESN Miles 34235 343 4 10 9 8 7 6 1 Fuelgauge 77 6 External temperature 75 2 Speedometer 7 Electronic displays 16 3 Indicator warning lamps 14 8 Miles trip miles 75 4 Tachometer 76 9 Clock 80 5 Engine oil temperature 76 10 Reset miles 75 Indicator warning lamps Overview indicator warning lamps Instrument cluster Symbol Function or system Turn signal Parking brake Automatic Hold The indicator and warning lamps can light up in Front fog lamps a variety of combinations and colors Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning when the engine is started or the ig nition is switched on and light up briefly in the process High beams B52 8 Ft 14 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 u lt 3 O SE TI O cr O O lt Nn D 3 Tm G oD Poa NS a Pad SJ 22 e E ew AD High be
160. emory buttons 4 Volume on off 5 Change wave band AM FM station Selecting a station 1 Radio 2 FM or AM 3 Select the desired station Q Manual CARIVARI ENERGY GONG96 3 v KLASSIK 100 0 MHz 101 3 MHz All saved stations are stored for the remote con trol currently in use I gt Press the button 174 Storing a station 1 Radio 2 FM or AM 3 Highlight the desired station Q Manual CARIVARI ENERGY GONG96 3 v KLASSIK 100 0 MHz 101 3 MHz 4 Press the controller for an extended period 5 Select the desired memory location The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use The stations can also be stored on the program mable memory buttons refer to page 23 Selecting a station manually Station selection via the frequency Radio EM or AM Manual YY To select the frequency turn the controller t FM manual og 7 To store the station press the controller for an extended period Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 RDS RDS broadcasts additional information such as the station name in the FM wave band When playing a station with multiple frequencies the system automatically switches to the frequency with the best reception if needed Switching the RDS on off 1 Radio 2 EM 3 Open Options 4 RDS yr Options LY Split screen Switch off control display FM Display Owner
161. en Options 3 Additional options 4 Select title 5 Select the desired track VCD SVCD 1 4 Select track 2 Select the desired track Selecting the camera angle The availability of a different camera angle de pends on the DVD and the current DVD track 1 Turn the controller during playback Open Options Additional options Viewing angle oo 2 Select the desired camera angle Opening the main menu back These functions are not contained on every DVD Therefore they may not be available for use DVD changer In the glove compartment Pull down the release cover The DVD changer tilts down To close fold the DVD changer up until it en gages Fold up the DVD changer Always fold the DVD changer back up after filling and emptying it otherwise the DVD changer could be damaged lt Controls and displays Empty DVD compartments LED on DVD slot Buttons for DVD compartments DVD slot Fill DVD compartments a fF O N Filling the DVD compartments individually 1 LOAD Press the button The LED on the first empty compartment flashes c e3 z Pir ba cc c LL 2 Select another compartment if necessary 3 Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flash 4 Insert a single CD or DVD in the middle The CD DVD is drawn in automatically and placed into the selected compartment Sliding in CDs DVDs Do not insert the CD DVD until the LEDs o
162. en the following steps are adhered to 66 1 Depress the brake pedal 2 Engage transmission position N 3 Release the parking brake or deactivate Au tomatic Hold refer to page 68 4 Switch the engine off Transmission position P with the ignition off When the ignition is switched off position P is engaged automatically When in an automatic car wash for example ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally lt Transmission position P is engaged automati cally gt When the ignition is switched off gt After approx 15 minutes if the vehicle is not moved Parking brake The concept The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is parked gt Engine switched off the parking brake acts on the rear wheels gt Engine running the parking brake acts on the disc brakes of the front and rear wheels via the hydraulic brake system The parking brake can be set manually or auto matically gt Manual by pulling and pushing the switch gt Automatic by activating Automatic Hold re fer to page 68 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Setting O Pull the switch The LED lights up The indicator lamp lights up in red The parking brake is set Indicator lamp in Canadian models While driving Use while driving Pull the switch and hold it The vehicle brakes hard while the button is being pulled The indicator lamp lights up in
163. enon bulb fails switch on the front fog lamps and continue the trip with great care Comply with local regulations Do not perform work bulb replacement on xenon headlamps Have any work on the xenon lighting system in cluding bulb replacement performed only by a service center Due to the high voltage present in the system there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is car ried out improperly For checking and adjusting headlamp aim please contact your BMW center Turn signals incl side indicators Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs refer to page 240 These lamps are made using LED technology Please contact your service center in the event of a malfunction Adaptive light control Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs refer to page 240 The illustration shows the left side of the engine compartment 55 watt bulb H3 1 Open the folding cover in the engine com partment 241 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Mobility Replacing components 3 Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise 2 Remove the screws Remove the bulb and replace it 3 Pull the lamp out toward the front Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in 4 Remove the bulb and replace it the reverse order 5 Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in the reverse order Parking lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and Tail lamps bulb replacement bu
164. ent profile is selected 3 Open Options 4 Reset current profile Importing profiles Existing settings and contacts are overwritten with the imported profile 1 Settings 2 Profiles 3 Import profile 3 Profiles Import profile Export profile Guest 4 USB interface refer to page 140 USB device Exporting profiles Most settings of the active profile and the saved contacts can be exported 1 Settings 2 Profiles 3 Export profile 4 USB interface refer to page 140 USB device Display profile list during start The profile list can be displayed during each start for selecting the desired profile Settings Profiles Options eo Display user list at startup Personal Profile settings The following functions and settings can be stored in a profile More information on the settings can be found under gt Active Cruise Control collision warning re fer to page 112 gt Exterior mirror position refer to page 58 CD Multimedia refer to page 181 audio source listened to last gt Dynamic Driving Control sport program re fer to page 104 gt Driver s seat position refer to page 48 Programmable memory buttons refer to page 23 assignment gt Head up Display refer to page 126 selec tion brightness and position of display gt Headlamp courtesy delay feature refer to page 86 time setting gt Tone refer to page 172 tone
165. erv ice Request is active Editing a contact Change the entries in Contacts When a con tact is changed the changes are not stored on the mobile phone A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle 1 Highlight the contact 2 Open Options 3 Edit entry The contact can be edited Redialing General information The eight phone numbers dialed last are dis played Dialing the number via the instrument cluster This is possible when there is no active call 1 Press the button on the steering wheel 2 Select the desired phone number The connection is established Dialing the number via the iDrive 1 Telephone 2 Redial 3 Select the desired entry The connection is established 208 i Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Deleting a single entry or all entries 1 Highlight the entry 2 Open Options 3 Delete entry or Delete list Saving an entry in the contacts 1 Highlight the entry 2 Open Options 3 Store as new contact or Add to existing contact 4 Select the type of number Home Business Mobile or Other 5 Complete the entries if necessary If necessary Store contact Received calls Displaying calls The 20 calls that were last received are dis played 1 Telephone 2 Received calls t S Telephone Active calls Phone book Redial lt P Received calls r Dial number Messages Bluetooth telephone Calling a num
166. es or decreases by a maximum of 5 mph 10 km h gt Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance point and holding it accelerates or deceler ates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator After the rocker switch is released the vehicle maintains its final speed Pressing the switch beyond the re sistance point causes the vehicle to accel erate more rapidly The rocker switch can be pressed while inter rupted to maintain and store the current speed Resuming the desired speed FRES Press the button The stored speed is reached and maintained i i C Displays in the instrument cluster 1 Display of desired speed 2 Indicator lamp 3 Brief status display Desired speed Display in the speedometer gt The marking lights up in green the system is active VA gt The marking lights up in or i ange the system has been interrupted gt The marking does not light up the system is switched off Brief status display Brief display in the speedometer Selected desired speed 5 If appears briefly conditions may not be ad equate to operate the system PDC Park Distance Control The concept In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control the backup camera refer to page 120 can be switched on PDC supports you when parking Objects that you are approaching slowly in front of or behind your vehicle are indicated with gt Signal tones gt Visual display 115 O
167. ess 1 Select the message 2 Open Options 3 Store contact in vehicle Deleting messages 1 Highlight the message 2 Open Options 3 Delete message or Delete all messages Hands free system General information Calls that are being made on the hands free system can be continued on the mobile phone and vice versa From the mobile phone to the hands free system Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued on the hands free system with the ignition switched on Depending on the mobile phone the system au tomatically switches to the hands free system Ifthe system does not switch over automatically follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis play refer also to the mobile phone operating instructions From the hands free system to the mobile phone Calls that are made on the hands free system can in some cases be continued on the mobile phone this depends on the mobile phone Follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis play refer also to the mobile phone operating instructions 210 Voice operation The concept gt The mobile phone can be operated without taking your hands from the steering wheel gt In many cases the entries are accompanied by announcements or questions gt Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system Using voice activation Activating the voice activation system i Gs Briefly press
168. estination input Manual destination entry General information The system supports you in entering street names and house numbers by automatically completing the entry and providing entry com parisons refer to page 24 Stored town city and street names can be called up quickly gt Ifthe existing entries should not be changed the entries for the state province and town city can be skipped gt Destination guidance is started to the town city center if no street is entered Entering a state province 1 Press the MENU button 2 Navigation 3 Enter address Navigation Zieleingabe Adressbuch Letzte Ziele Sonderziele Karte Gespeicherte Reisen Routenverlauf 4 Select State Province or the displayed state province Entering a town city 1 Select Town City Postal Code or the dis played town city Gy Enter address UNITED STATES Town City BEVERLY HILLS CA Street I House number Intersection Accept destination Points of Interest at loc 2 Select letters if necessary The list is narrowed down further with each entry 3 Move the controller to the right 4 Select the town city name from the list If there are several towns cities with the same name 1 Change to the list of town city names 2 Highlight the town city With the Professional navigation system A preview map Is displayed on the split screen 3 Select the town city 154 f Onlin
169. event of an accident Adjusting the head restraint Correctly adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in an accident lt Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap proximately at ear level Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head 56 Adjusting the height manual head restraints gt To raise pull gt To lower press the button arrow 1 and push the head restraint down Adjusting the height power head restraints Move the switch in the desired direction Adjusting the side sections Fold the side extensions on the head restraint forward for increased lateral support in the rest ing position Removing manual head restraints Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 az 1 Pull the head restraint upward as far as pos sible 2 Press the button arrow 1 and pull the head restraint out completely Before transporting passengers Reinstall the head restraint before trans porting anyone in the seat otherwise the pro tective function of the head restraint is unavail able Removing power head restraints For technical reasons the head restraint cannot be removed Seat mirror and steering wheel memory General information T
170. f this symbol is printed on the packaging or in the instructions of the hand held transmitter the remote controlled de vice is generally compatible with the universal remote control If you have any questions please contact gt Your service center gt www homelink com on the Internet 134 Programming gt LED arrow 1 gt Memory buttons arrow 2 Fixed code hand held transmitters 1 Switch on the ignition 2 Initial setup Press both outer buttons 1 and 3 for approx 20 seconds until the LED flashes All programs of the three memory buttons arrow 2 are Cleared 3 Hold the hand held transmitter at a distance of approx 2 to 8 in 5 to 20 cm from the mem ory buttons 4 Simultaneously press the transmit button of the hand held transmitter and the memory button of the universal remote control The LED flashes slowly 5 Release both buttons when the LED flashes rapidly Ifthe LED does not flash rapidly after approx 15 seconds change the distance and repeat the step The device can be operated using the memory button with the engine running or the ignition switched on Malfunction If the device cannot be used after repeated at tempts at programming please check whether the hand held transmitter is equipped with an alternating code system Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Todo so gt Read the instructions of the hand held transmitter gt Press the mem
171. fety gt During normal brake application the outer brake lamps light up gt During heavy brake application the inner brake lamps light up in addition 100 f Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Driving stability control systems Antilock Brake System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak Ing The vehicle remains steerable even during full brake applications thus increasing active safety ABS is operational every time you start the en gine Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost It thus helps to achieve the shortest possible braking distance during full braking This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the full braking Adaptive brake assistant In combination with the Active Cruise Control this system ensures that the brakes respond even more rapidly when braking in critical situa tions Refer also to Collision warning refer to page 112 DSC Dynamic Stability Control The concept DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when driving away and accelerating DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi tions such as fishtailing or nose diving Subject to physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes at individual wheels Adjust
172. front This function is not available with the following setting Driver control 1 Enter the destination 2 Suggest destination BMW Assist Operation is the same as for BMW Assist in the front refer to page 216 Adjusting The following settings are available gt Rear displays gt Language Units language can be set globally for all screens Tone gt If necessary Climate Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Vehicle information Computer content can be displayed Operation is only possible in the front Options menu The split screen is not available and there is no integrated Owner s Manual Operation is the same as for the front menu op tions refer to page 21 Enabling Enabling operation in the rear Only possible via the iDrive in the front 1 Settings 2 Allow rear control 3 Select the desired priority ice Allow rear control Driver control v Equal control Rear control has priority Switch off rear DVD Priority options The driver has priority gt The source selected via iDrive in the front is output on the vehicle loudspeakers and can be selected but not operated from the rear Other audio or video sources can be oper ated gt Sound can only be output in the rear via headphones gt The source that is to be displayed in the rear can be set via the iDrive in the front To set the source in the rear via the iDrive in the front
173. g avoid highways gt Therecommended route may differ from the route you would take based on personal ex perience gt The settings are stored for the remote con trol currently in use Changing the route criteria 1 Navigation 2 Map 3 Route preference 4 Select the criterion gt Fast route time optimized route be ing a combination of the shortest possi ble route and the fastest roads gt Efficient route optimized combina tion of the fastest and shortest route gt Short route short distance irrespec tive of how fast or slow progress will be gt Alternative routes other suggested alternative routes G Route preference Fast route Efficient route Short route 10 17 Alternative routes 10 24 a a l J 1 d L F Tey Te 10 27 5 Specify additional criteria for the route if necessary gt Avoid highways highways are avoided wherever possible 162 gt Avoid toll roads toll roads are avoided wherever possible gt Avoid ferries ferries are avoided where possible Dynamic destination guidance The route is automatically changed in the event of traffic obstructions gt The system does not point out traffic ob structions along the original route gt Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on the map gt Depending on the type of road and the na ture and length of the traffic obstruction the route can also be c
174. g circle 257 274 Turning circle lines backup camera 121 Turn signals front bulb re placement 241 Turn signals operation 70 Turn signals rear bulb re placement 242 U Unintentional alarm 43 Units of measure 81 Universal remote control 134 Unlock button automatic transmission 73 Unlocking locking from in side 38 Unlocking locking via door lock 37 Unlocking locking with remote control 35 Upholstery care 252 USB audio interface 193 USB interface 140 V Variable Damping Control re fer to Dynamic Damping Control 102 Variable steering Integral Ac tive Steering 102 Vehicle battery 244 Vehicle battery replacing 244 Vehicle breaking in 146 Vehicle care 252 Vehicle identification number refer to Identification number in the engine compart ment 234 Vehicle jack 244 Vehicle paint 252 Vehicle storage 253 Vehicle wash 251 Ventilation 131 Ventilation refer to Parked car ventilation 133 Version of navigation data 167 Video playback 183 Voice activation mobile phone 210 Voice activation short com mands 259 Voice activation system 25 Volume setting 172 W Warning lamps 14 Warning messages refer to Check Control 83 Warning triangle 247 Washer fluid 72 Washer fluid reservoir ca pacity 258 Washer nozzles wind shield 71 Washer system 70 Washing vehicle 251 Water on roads 147 Weather Band 175 Weights 258 Welcome lamps 86 Wheel base vehicle 257
175. ged front area of the vehicle gt Transmission position R engaged rear area of the vehicle Display on the Control Display Switching on the backup camera via the iDrive With PDC activated 1 Ry Rear view camera Select the symbol eb S amp O J lt Controls Driving tips AENEIS OIA Communication Entertainment oO 5 oO a oO aa Driving comfort 2 Press the controller The backup camera image is displayed The set ting is stored for the remote control currently in use Malfunction Depending on the vehicle s equipment the screen mask can also be turned by 90 A Check Control message refer to page 83 is displayed in the instrument cluster On the Control Display the areas in front of and behind the vehicle are shaded PDC has failed Have the system checked To ensure full operability gt Keep the sensors clean and free of ice gt When using high pressure washers do not spray the sensors for long periods and main tain a distance of at least 12 in 30 cm Surround View The concept Surround View includes the following systems gt Backup camera refer to page 120 gt Side View refer to page 122 gt Top View refer to page 118 It assists the driver when parking maneuvering and on blind driveways and intersections 118 Top View The concept Top View assists you in parking and maneuver ing The area ar
176. gt To shift up press the selector lever back ward The transmission only shifts up or down if the rom and vehicle speed are appropriate If the engine speed is too high the transmission does not shift down The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument panel followed by the current gear Ending the sport program manual mode Push the selector lever to the right D is displayed in the instrument cluster Displays in the instrument cluster The transmission position is dis played e g P 14 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Displays Instrument cluster At a glance ee PARK nN KP OFF AUTOH Miles 34235 10 9 Fuel gauge Speedometer Indicator warning lamps Tachometer a fF O N Oil temperature Odometer and trip odometer gt Odometer arrow 1 p gt Trip odometer arrow 2 343 4 S Press the knob gt When the ignition is switched off the time external temper ature and odometer are dis played gt When the ignition is switched on the trip odometer is reset 343 4 7 6 External temperature Electronic displays Miles trip miles Clock 10 Display reset miles O ON O External temperature External temperature warning ie n If the display drops to 37 F 3 C a signal sounds Temp A message is displayed in the in 74 0 F strument cluster There is the increased danger of ice Ice o
177. h protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected 116 False warnings PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range gt In heavy rain gt When sensors are very dirty or covered in ice gt When sensors are covered in snow On rough road surfaces gt In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls e g in underground garages gt In heavy exhaust Due to other ultrasound sources e g sweeping machines high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running Switching off automatically The system switches off and the LED goes out gt After approx 160 ft 50 m when driving for ward gt Above approx 22 mph 36 km h when driv ing forward Switch on the system again if necessary Switching on off manually PY Press the button gt On the LED lights up gt Off the LED goes out Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Signal tones When approaching an object an intermittent tone is sounded that indicates the position of the object For example if an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker The shorter the distance to the object becomes the shorter the intervals If the distance to a detected object is less than approx 12 in 30 cm a c
178. h for the rear a Press the button on the driver s door if children are being transported in the rear This locks various functions so that they cannot be operated from the rear safety switch refer to page 45 64 f Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Driving Start Stop button The concept Pressing the Start Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine START STOP Naw The engine starts if the brake pedal is pressed when you press the Start Stop button Ignition on Press the Start Stop button and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time All vehicle systems are ready for operation Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster light up for varying lengths of time To save battery power when the engine is off switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems power consumers The ignition switches off automatically gt During locking when the low beams are switched on gt Shortly before the battery is discharged completely so that the engine can still be started gt When the engine is switched off and the ig nition is switched on the system automati cally switches to radio ready state when the door is opened if the light is switched off or the daytime running lights are switched on Ignition off Press the Start Stop button again and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time All indicato
179. he button repeatedly to select Sam an operating mode gt LEDs off outside air flows in continuously gt LeftLED on automatic recirculated air con trol a sensor detects pollutants in the out side air and controls the shut off automati Cally gt Right LED on recirculated air mode the supply of outside air into the vehicle is per manently blocked 129 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 ki O m J O O Climate control If the windows are fogged over switch off the recirculated air mode and press the AUTO button on the driver s side to utilize the condensation sensor Make sure that air can flow onto the windshield Continuous recirculated air mode The recirculated air mode should not be used for an extended period of time as the air quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily lt Cooling function The passenger compartment can only be cooled with the engine running Press the button The air is cooled and dehumidified and depending on the temperature setting warmed again Depending on the weather the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program When using the automatic climate control con densation water refer to page 148 develops that exits underneath the vehicle Rear window defroster Press the button The rear window defroster switches off a
180. he programs Press the button a E oFF eL Program DSC OFF TRACTION SPORT SPORT NORMAL COMFORT For Dynamic Damper Control the lower button is labeled with COMFORT Automatic program change The system automatically switches to NORMAL in the following situations gt Failure of Integral Active Steering gt Failure of Dynamic Damping Control gt The vehicle has a flat tire DSC OFF Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends 103 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 tability control systems ivings Dr Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active Steering system are only performed by the rear axle steering To increase vehicle stability activate DSC again as soon as possible Activating DSC OFF Era Press and hold the button but not lon co ger than approx 10 seconds until the indicator lamp for the DSC lights up in the in strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed in the tachometer The DSC system is switched off Deactivating DSC OFF EYS Press the button DSC OFF and the DSC indicator lamp go out Indicator warning lamps When DSC is deactivated DSC OFF is dis played in the tachometer amp The indicator lamp lights up DSC is de activated TRACTION Maximum traction on loose road surfaces DTC Dynamic Traction Control is switched on Driv ing stability is limited during acceleration and
181. he window opens automatically Pressing again stops the motion Closing rN Danger of pinching 44 Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear other wise injuries may result i a gt Pull the switch to the resistance point The window closes while the switch is held m gt Pull the switch beyond the resistance point The window closes automatically Pressing the switch stops the motion Convenience operation refer to page 36 via the remote control or the door lock Pinch protection system If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes the closing action is interrupted The window reopens slightly Danger of pinching even with pinch pro tection Even with the pinch protection system check that the window s closing path is clear other wise the closing action may not stop in certain situations e g if thin objects are present lt Window accessories Do not install any accessories in the range of movement of the windows otherwise the pinch protection system will be impaired lt Closing without the pinch protection system For example if there is an external danger or if ice on the windows prevents a window from closing normally proceed as follows 1 Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value 2 P
182. headlamp flasher Turn signal Press the lever beyond the resistance point To switch off manually press the lever to the re sistance point Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in dicates that a turn signal bulb has failed PIC urn signali active Press the lever to the resistance point The turn signal flashes three times The function can be activated or deactivated 1 Settings 2 Lighting 3 Triple turn signal amp F Lighting Pathway light Os FY Triple turn signal O Daytime running lamps O Welcome light Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash 70 High beams headlamp flasher gt High beams arrow 1 gt Headlamp flasher arrow 2 Washer wiper system Switching the wipers on off and brief wipe Do not switch on the wipers if frozen Do not switch on the wipers if they are fro zen onto the windshield otherwise the wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor may be damaged lt Press the wiper levers up The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released gt Normal wiping speed press up once The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary gt Fast wiping speed press up twice or press once beyond the resistance point The wipers switch to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 0
183. hed on via the iDrive Switching off automatically The system switches off and the LED goes out gt After approx 33 ft 10 m when driving for ward gt After approx 9 mph 15 km h when driving forward Switch on the system again if necessary Switching on off manually IN Press the button gt On the LED lights up gt Off the LED goes out The PDC is shown on the Control Display Switch on the backup camera via the iDrive refer to page 122 Assistance functions Functional requirement gt The backup camera is switched on gt The tailgate is fully closed Pathway lines gt Can be shown in the backup camera image when in transmission position R gt Help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads 120 l Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 gt Aredependentonthecurrentsteeringangle 2 Turn the steering wheel to the point where and are continuously adjusted to the steer the pathway line covers the corresponding ing wheel movements turning circle line Show the parking aid lines refer to page 121 Turning circle lines 2 O m J O O Can be shown in the backup camera image Show the course of the smallest possible turning circle on a level road gt Only one turning circle line is displayed when the steering wheel is turned Show the parking aid lines refer to page 121 ising pathway an
184. hen rapidly approaching a truck When a vehi cle driving ahead of you is reliably detected the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers if necessary You must react yourself otherwise there is the danger of an accident occurring lt Swerving vehicles When approaching a curve the system may re act briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve Any deceleration of the vehicle by the system can be compensated for by briefly accelerating After the accelerator pedal is released the system becomes active again and independently controls the speed In some situations the vehicle cannot drive away automatically e g on steep inclines or be If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves hind bumps in the road into your lane from behind a stopped vehicle 111 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Driving comfort Radar sensor Position Radar sensor Dirty or covered sensor A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the detec tion of vehicles gt Ifnecessary clean the radar sensor Re move layers of snow and ice carefully gt Donotcover the view field of the radar sen sor Malfunction The system cannot be activated if the sensor is not aligned correctly This may be caused by damage incurred during parking for example A message is displayed if the system fails For US owners only The transmitter and rec
185. herwise damage may result Press the button on the tailgate arrow 2 and open the tailgate Provide edge protection Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear window while driving and damage the heating 39 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 i wires of the rear window Provide edge protec tion Closing Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate can be used to conveniently pull down the tail gate Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the tail gate is clear otherwise injuries may result lt Automatic Soft Closing To close the tailgate fully press down lightly only It is closed automatically Locking the vehicle g Press the button on the open tailgate The vehicle is locked completely Automatic trunk lid operation Adjusting the opening height You can set how far the large tailgate should open v fz s o ES lt x Controls Driving tips Navigation fofeyailialelaliersidtelal Entertainment v 3 g O Opening and closing Adjusting the opening height When setting the opening height ensure that there is a clearance of at least 4 in 10 cm above the tailgate Otherwise the ceiling may not be high enough for the open tailgate if the load situation changes lt 1 Settings 2 Tailgate 3 Turn the controller until the desired opening height is selected Opening th
186. hicle gt Unlocking of the tailgate separately gt Starting the engine Functional requirements gt To lock the vehicle the remote control must be located outside of the vehicle 41 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Opening and closing gt The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx 2 seconds gt The engine can only be started if the remote control is inside the vehicle Comparison with ordinary remote control The functions can be controlled by pressing the buttons or via Comfort Access Unlocking Fully grasp a door handle arrow 1 This corre sponds to pressing the af button Locking a Press the area on the door handle arrow 2 with your finger for approx 1 second This corresponds to pressing the button To save battery power ensure that the ignition and all electronic systems and or power con sumers are switched off before locking the ve hicle Unlocking the tailgate separately Press the middle button on the exterior of the tailgate refer to page 38 to open the small tail gate This corresponds to pressing the button Press the right hand button on the exterior of the tailgate to open the large tailgate This corresponds to pressing the lt gt button Ignition on Pressing the Start Stop button switches the ig nition on When doing so do not depress the brake pedal otherwise the engine will start
187. ic search 189 Music storing 187 N Navigation 154 Navigation data 167 Neck restraints front refer to Head restraints 55 Neck restraints rear refer to Head restraints 56 New wheels and tires 231 Night Vision with pedestrian detection 123 NORMAL program Dynamic Driving Control 105 Notes 6 Number of cylinders en gine 257 Nylon rope for tow starting towing 250 O OBD Onboard Diagnos tics 238 Obstacle marking backup camera 121 Odometer 75 Oil 236 Oil adding 236 Oil additives 236 Oil change interval service re quirements 82 Oil filler neck 236 Oil level check 236 Oil types alternative 236 Oil types approved 236 Old batteries disposal 244 Onboard computer refer to Computer 78 Onboard Diagnostics OBD 238 Onboard monitor refer to Control Display 19 Opening closing from in side 38 Opening closing via door lock 37 Opening closing with remote control 35 Operating concept iDrive 19 Outside air refer to Automatic recirculated air control 129 Outside temperature warn ing 75 Overheating of engine refer to Coolant temperature 76 P Paint vehicle 252 Pairing mobile phone 204 Panic mode 36 Panoramic glass sunroof 45 Park Distance Control PDC 115 Parked car ventilation 133 Parked vehicle condensa tion 148 Parking aid refer to PDC 115 Parking brake 66 Parking lamps 86 Parking lamps bulb replace ment 242 Parking with Auto Hold 68 Parts and accessories 7
188. id any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or there is heavy rain briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles Ensure that this action does not endanger other road users The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it Hills Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required Otherwise the brake system may overheat resulting ina reduction in the brake system efficiency 147 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Q S D gt m Things to remember when driving You can increase the engine s braking effect by shifting down in the manual mode of the auto matic transmission refer to page 72 Avoid load on the brakes Avoid placing excessive load on the brake system Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures brake wear and pos sibly even brake failure Do not drive in neutral Do not drive in neutral or with the engine stopped as doing so disables engine braking In addition steering and brake assist is unavailable with the engine stopped lt No objects in the area around the pedals Never allow floor mats carpets or any other objects t
189. ied out properly there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards lt Wheel and tire combination Information on the correct wheel tire combina tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be ob tained from your service center Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC To maintain good handling and vehicle re sponse use only tires with a single tread con figuration from a single manufacturer Following tire damage have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible Approved wheels and tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recom mends that you use only wheels and tires that have been approved for your particular vehicle model For example despite having the same official size ratings variations can lead to body contact and with it the risk of severe accidents The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu ate non approved wheels and tires to determine if they are suited for use and therefore cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they are mounted lt Recommended tire brands For each tire size the manufacturer of your ve hicle recommends certain tire brands These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall With proper use these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec ommend the
190. ies the steering angle of the wheels in relation to the steering wheel move ment as a function of the speed At speeds up to approx 37 mph 60 km h e g in curves the steering angle is increased i e steering becomes more direct The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in a direction opposite to the front wheels At higher speeds the steering angle is increas ingly reduced The rear wheels are turned to the same angle as the front wheels In critical situations Integral Active Steering can specifically steer the front and rear wheels to stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes e g when braking where road conditions differ on the left and right sides of the vehicle Initializing In rare cases it may become necessary to initi alize the Integral Active Steering i The warning lamp lights up A message appears on the Control Display 1 With the engine running turn the steering wheel all the way to the left and right several Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 times in a uniform manner until the warning lamp disappears 2 Have the system checked if the warning lamp does not go out after moving the steer ing wheel approx 6 times or if the steering wheel is at an angle Using snow chains Ensure that the rear axle steering is deactivated when using snow chains refer to page 233 Programs The system offers two different
191. ime Information on BMW e g on technology is available on the Internet bmwusa com Symbols FN Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of per sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle Marks the end of a specific item of informa tion Indicates special equipment country specific equipment and optional accessories as well as equipment and functions not yet available at the time of printing Identifies Control Display texts used to se lect individual functions Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac tivation system Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system amp Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment Symbols on vehicle components Ii Recommends that you study the relevant section of this Owner s Manual in connection with a particular part or assembly Your individual vehicle You have decided in favor of a vehicle with indi vidualized equipment and features This Owner s Manual describes the entire array of options and equipment available for a specific model As aresult the manual may contain accessories and equipment that you may not have specified for your own vehicle All options and special equipment are marked with an asterisk For options and equipment not described in this Owner s Manual please refer to the Supple mentary Owner s Manuals On righ
192. imum tread depth Wear indicators are distributed around the tire s circumference and have the legally required minimum height of 0 063 in 1 6 mm They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI Tread Wear Indicator Tire damage Inspect your tires often for damage foreign ob jects lodged in the tread and tread wear Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de fects gt Unusual vibrations during driving gt Unusual handling such as a strong tendency to pull to the left or right In case of tire damage If there are indications of tire damage re duce your speed immediately and have the wheels and tires checked right away otherwise there is the increased risk of an accident Drive carefully to the next service center or tire shop If necessary have the vehicle towed lt Repair of tire damage For safety reasons the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired they should be re placed Otherwise damage can occur as a re sult lt Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Tire age Recommendation regardless of wear replace tires at least every 6 years Manufacture date On the sidewall DOT 3508 the tire was manufactured in the 35th week in 2008 Changing wheels and tires Mounting Information on mounting tires Have mounting and balancing performed only by a service center or tire specialist If this work is not carr
193. in terior temperatures 45 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 i Driver s door controls a I ji Roller blinds for rear side windows Press the button Rear door controls pa Roller blind for the side windows Press the button The roller blind can only be extended or re tracted when the side window is closed Raising and lowering the roller blinds together Press the button Panoramic glass sunroof General information The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be operated together or separately using the same switch The glass sunroof is operational when the igni tion is switched on At a glance Ly e Le p e O Driving tips AENEIS OLD Communication Entertainment Y O D Soom 2 O aa Opening and closing Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear otherwise injuries may result lt Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children for example cannot operate the roof and injure them selves lt Raising the glass sunroof Press the switch briefly gt The closed roof is raised and the sliding visor opens slightly gt The opened roof closes until itis in its raised position The sliding visor stays completely open Pressing the switch again closes the sliding viso
194. ined high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law 229 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 gt o Wheels and tires Temperature grade for this tire The temperature grade for this tire is es tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinfla tion or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and pos sible tire failure If necessary have the vehicle towed lt RSC Run flat tires Run flat tires refer to page 232 are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall M S Winter and all season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires Tire tread Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0 12 in 3 mm There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tread depth is less than 0 12 in 3 mm Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0 16 in 4 mm Below a tread depth of 0 16 in 4 mm tires are less suitable for winter operation 230 Min
195. ing Enter address Address book Last destinations Points of Interest Interactive map Entering intermediate destinations A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can be entered for one trip 1 Enter new destination 160 l Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 2 Select the type of destination entry and en ter the intermediate destination GE New destination Enter address using Enter address Address book Last destinations Points of Interest Interactive map 3 Select Add as another dest 4 Select the location where the intermediate destination is to be inserted Reposition dest in the trip Starting the trip After all intermediate destinations have been entered Start guidance Or select a trip that has already been stored if available Stored trips With the Professional navigation system Storing a trip Up to 30 created trips can be stored in the trip list Open Options Store trip Enter the letters OK gt E Trip direction The trip direction is reversed intermediate des tinations are displayed in reverse order in the list Map Guidance Options v o E Reverse order of trip dest Intermediate destination options 1 Destination in the trip 2 Select an intermediate destination 161 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f gt Reposition dest in the trip move an intermediate destination to an
196. ing until the engine Is started but no longer than approx 5 minutes An alarm has been triggered Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car Interior motion sensor The windows and glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can be switched off together such as in the fol lowing situations gt In duplex garages gt During transport on car carrying trains at sea or on a trailer 43 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Opening and closing gt When animals are to remain in the vehicle Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Press the button on the remote control twice in succession The indicator lamp lights up for approx 2 sec onds and then flashes continuously The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again Power windows General information Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children for example cannot operate the power windows and injure themselves lt Opening P gt Press the switch to the resistance point The window opens while the switch is held gt Press the switch beyond the resist ance point T
197. ing the tone settings Tonex AJ D 2 O F Calling up the radio gt Radio lt Calling up an FM station gt F Mk Opening manual search gt Manuak 260 f Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 At a glance Calling up a frequency Frequency megahertz e g 93 5 megahertz or frequency 93 5 Selecting the frequency range gt Select frequency AM 2 O km d O O Calling up an AM station A Me Opening manual search gt Manuak Calling up a frequency Frequency Kilohertz e g fre quency 753 or 753 kilohertz Weather Band Calling up the Weather Band Weather band Switching on the Weather Band Weather band on Selecting a Weather Band station gt Select a weather channek Satellite radio fOreyailalelalcershalelal Entertainment Calling up the satellite radio gt Satellite radio lt Switching on the satellite radio gt Satellite radio om Selecting a satellite radio channel gt Select satellite radio e g satellite radio channel 2 Stored stations Opening the stored stations Presets lt Choosing a stored station gt Select preset Selecting a stored station Preset lt e g stored station 2 261 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f Driving tips Navigation Mobility 3 S f am 3 pa oD Ga 0 ad Short commands for voice activation system Telephone Opening the Telephone menu Displaying th
198. isplayed Malfunction The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously The tires are displayed in gray on the Control Display No flat tire can be detected Display in the following situations gt Malfunction have the system checked gt A wheel without wheel electronics is fitted have the service center check it ifnecessary gt Disturbance by systems or devices with the same radio frequency after leaving the area of the disturbance the system automatically becomes active again Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la bel you should determine the proper tire infla tion pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that il luminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under in flated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 an
199. ist 3 Select the desired album A h in the list Say the desired entry in the list Depending on the album the tracks or the 5 Select other categories if you wish subdirectories of the album are displayed To select a track directly gt Title The first track is played automatically if pos Say the spoken instruction and the name of the sible desired track in a single sentence i A E Music collection q Music search Current playback Top 50 Current playback List of tracks that was generated last by the mu sic search or the album selected last Audio CD 1 1 CD Multimedia r Hits v Frank LIEBLINGSSONGS 2 Music collection 3 Current playback GF Music collection 4 Change directories if needed to select ANV an tracks Music search l To go up a level in the directory move the controller to the left Current playback Top 50 io CD 1 Sater Random playback Frank l l USB 1 All tracks of the selection are played back in ran f LIEBLINGSSONGS dom order 1 CD Multimedia 4 Select the desired track if necessary 2 Music collection Top 50 3 Open Options The 50 most frequently played tracks 4 Random 1 CD Multimedia Options 2 Music collection RR Display Owner s Manual 3 Top 50 111 Free memory 4 Select the desired track if necessary y YAA IE E CD Multimedia Albums ur Select rear source O Random All stored alb
200. ist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you Enhanced Roadside Assistance BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a break down If possible the vehicle and position data are transmitted in the process Customer Relations connection with Cus tomer Relations for information on all as pects of your vehicle TeleService data on your vehicle s service status or required inspections are transmit ted to your service center either automati cally before a service due date or when you request a BMW service appointment Remote Door Unlock the BMW Assist Re sponse Center provides assistance if for ex ample the remote control is not available and the vehicle needs to be opened Stolen Vehicle Recovery after you report that your vehicle was stolen to the police the BMW Assist Response Center can deter mine its position In addition to these services the optional Convenience Plan offers a Concierge serv ice and information for route planning traf fic and weather A limited number of calls can be made via the BMW Assist Response Center with Critical Calling if for example the mobile phone is not available or dis charged Press the SOS button to contact the BMW Assist Response Center You can also access the BMW Assist Con cierge service via the Internet Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 TeleService General info
201. itching off the ignition the system must be switched on again Screens Adjusting Danger of burns when screen is folded out Do not reach behind the screen other wise there is the danger of getting burned The back of the screen can become very hot lt gt To fold out pull at the bottom edge gt To fold in press against the bottom edge Notes gt Donot cover lower screen edge since this is where the sensors and the infrared inter face are installed gt When loading the rear seats and adjusting the backrest of the front seat fold in the screens gt When using the through loading system fold the screens down gt When cleaning the screen follow the care instructions refer to page 253 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Remote control In the center armrest in the rear Storage is possible in a vertical or horizontal po sition in the center armrest Menu navigation Press the but Function ton Operating concept as for the front controller Turn the wheel highlight a menu item Press the center knob con firm the selection Press the arrow buttons change between panels Opens the main menu Displays the previous menu Opens the Options menu Changes the station track or chapter Press and hold the button fast forward reverse Press the but Function Adjusts the volume ton TOR Switches the volume adjust ment t
202. ition during closing The glass sunroof opens again slightly Danger of pinching even with pinch pro tection Despite the pinch protection system check that the roof s closing path is clear otherwise the closing action may not be interrupted in certain extreme situations such as when thin objects are present lt Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Closing without the pinch protection system For example if there is an external danger pro ceed as follows At a glance 1 Press the switch forward beyond the resist ance point and hold Pinch protection is limited and the roof re opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value Controls 2 Press the switch forward again beyond the resistance point and hold until the roof closes without pinch protection Initializing after a power failure After a power failure it may only be possible to operate the roof to a limited extent Driving tips Have the system initialized by your service cen ter AE EL OIA J eb cc J G LLI Communication Mobility Reference 47 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Adjusting Adjusting Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital con tribution to relaxed fatigue free driving The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with gt Safety belts refer to page 53 gt Head restrai
203. itive side facing upwards 5 Press the cover closed Ry Takethe used battery to a recycling cen ter or to your service center Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 New remote controls You can obtain new remote controls from your service center Loss of the remote controls Lost remote controls can be blocked by your service center Emergency detection of remote control It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the engine in situations such as the following gt Remote control malfunction gt Interference of radio transmission to remote control by external sources gt Discharged battery in the remote control A message is displayed on the Control Display if an attempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine Starting the engine in case of emergency detection of remote control f If a corresponding message appears on the Control Display as shown hold the remote con trol against the marked area on the steering col umn and press the Start Stop button within 10 seconds while depressing the brake Personal Profile The concept You can set several of your vehicle s functions to suit your personal needs and preferences gt The settings are automatically saved in the profile currently activated 33 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f gt The remote control used is detected when the vehicle is unlocked and the stored profile is
204. kle Unbuckling the belt 1 Hold the belt firmly 2 Press the red button in the belt buckle 3 Guide the belt back into its reel Safety belt reminder for driver s and front passenger seat e The indicator lamp flashes or lights up and a signal sounds Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly The safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx 5 mph 8 km h It can also be ac tivated if objects are placed on the front pas senger seat Damage to safety belts In the case of strain caused by accidents or damage Have the safety belts including the safety belt tensioners replaced and have the belt anchors checked Checking and replacing safety belts Have the work performed only by your service center otherwise it cannot be ensured that this safety feature will function properly Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Front head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident Adjusting the head restraint Correctly adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in an accident lt Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap proximately at ear level Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head Active head restraint In the event of a re
205. l idays Phone numbers of the Response Center of Roadside Assistance in your home country re fer to the Contact brochure Jump starting Notes If the battery is discharged an engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles adhere strictly to the following proce dure Do not touch live parts To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury always avoid all contact with electrical compo nents while the engine is running lt Preparation 1 Check whether the battery of the other ve hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi mately the same capacity in Ah This infor mation can be found on the battery 2 Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi cle 3 Switch off any electronic systems power consumers in both vehicles Bodywork contact between vehicles Make sure that there is no contact be tween the bodywork of the two vehicles other wise there is the danger of short circuits Starting aid terminals yn Connecting order 247 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 gt ie o Breakdown assistance Connect the jumper cables in the correct order otherwise there is the danger of injury from sparking The so called starting aid terminal in the engine compartment acts as the battery s positive ter minal
206. layer Insert the CD DVD with the printed side up Playback begins automatically Reading can take a few minutes with com pressed audio files Starting playback There is a CD DVD in the CD DVD player or changer 1 CD Multimedia 2 CD DVD 181 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f 3 Select the desired CD or DVD QF CD DVD v Best off Brothers in arms amp CD Rom Ss Mezzanine amp Reload amp Beautifu amp Black Market Music CD DVD player i amp DVD changer CD DVD player rear Playable formats gt gt DVD DVD ROM DVD R DVD R DVD RW DVD RW DVD R DL DVD R DL DVD audio video part only DVD video CD CD ROM CD R CD RW CD DA VCD SVCD Compressed audio files MP3 WMA AAC Audio playback Selecting the track using the button Press the button repeatedly until the desired track is played At a glance Controls Q Ez D Ea d m Entertainment fWNavigaton Communication Mobility eb S G eb da co Ge 0 ad Santana amp Supernatural 00 38 223 249 Prince O G Santana D Sportfreunde Stiller C l Tom Jones J QO Bruce Springsteen jia 00 28 01 14 FEA Store in vehicle Nowhere Youll Be Comin Down Livin In The Future If information about a track has been stored it is displayed automatically Select the desired track to begin playback gt Interpret
207. lbs refer to page 240 These lamps are made using LED technology At a glance Please contact your service center in the event of a malfunction Front fog lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs refer to page 240 35 watt bulb H8 1 Carefully pull out the grill toward the front Turn signal Backup lamp Rear fog lamp Tail lamp a fF QOQ N Brake lamp Turn signal brake tail and license plate lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs refer to page 240 These lights are made using LED technology Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction 242 E Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 yj lamp at 4 Replace the bulb jackup 1 Remove the four screws using the screw driver from the tool kit To change the rear fog lamp contact your serv ice center 16 watt bulb W16W 3 Pull off the connector toward the left Turn the bulb pull it out and replace it Changing wheels Notes Your vehicle is equipped with run flat tires refer to page 232 as standard equipment They do not need to be replaced immediately in the event of a puncture When mounting new tires or changing from summer to winter tires or vice versa use run flat tires for your own safety No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire h e The tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from your service center
208. le phone audio interface rai Rear AUX IN port Br Rear AUX IN port on the right AUX IN port Ata glance gt For connecting audio devices e g MP3 player The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers gt Recommendation use medium tone and volume settings on the audio device The tone depends on the quality of the audio files Connecting The AUX IN port is in the center armrest Connect the headphones or line out connector of the device to the jack plug Playback 1 Connect the audio device switch it on and select a track on the audio device 2 CD Multimedia 3 If necessary External devices 4 AUX front Volume The volume of the sound output is dependent on the audio device If this volume differs mark edly from the volume of the other audio sources it is advisable to adjust the volumes Adjusting the volume 1 CD Multimedia 2 If necessary External devices 3 AUX front 192 l Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 4 Volume I amp F AUX front AUX active Volume 111117 5 Turn the controller until the desired volume is set and press the controller USB audio interface mobile phone audio interface It is possible to connect external audio devices They can be operated on the iDrive The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers i gt Connection via USB audio interface Apple iPod iPhone USB devices e g MP3 play ers US
209. ll risk of use Total Traffic Network BMW NA and their suppliers make no representations about content traffic and road conditions route usability or speed C The licensed material is provided to li censee as is and where is Total Traffic Network including but not limited to any and all third party providers of any of the li censed material expressly disclaims to the fullest extent permitted by law all warranties or representations with respect to the li censed material including without limita tion that the licensed material will be error free will operate without interruption or that the traffic data will be accurate express im plied or statutory including without limita tion the implied warranties of merchanta bility non infringement fitness for a particular purpose or those arising from a course of dealing or usage of trade D Neither Total Traffic Network Inrix Inc or BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect special consequential exemplary or inci dental damages including without limita tion lost revenues anticipated revenues or profits relating to the same arising from any claim relating directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data and even if Total Traffic Net work Inrix Inc or BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such damages These limita tions apply to all claims including without limitation claims in contract and tort such as negligence produ
210. lletins from radio sta tions that broadcast the TMC Traffic Mes sage Channel of a traffic information serv ice Information on traffic obstructions and hazards is updated continuously Certain BMW models equipped with navi gation have the capability to display real time traffic information If your system has this capability the following additional terms and conditions apply An End User shall no longer have the right to use the Traffic Data in the event that the End User is in material breach of the terms and conditions contained herein A Total Traffic Network a division of Clear Channel Broadcasting Inc Total Traffic Network holds the rights to the traffic in cident data and RDS TMC network through which it is delivered You may not modify copy scan or use any other method to re produce duplicate republish transmit or distribute in any way any portion of traffic in cident data You agree to indemnify defend and hold harmless BMW of North America LLC BMW NA and Total Traffic Net work Inrix Inc and their affiliates against any and all claims damages costs or other expenses that arise directly or indirectly out of a your unauthorized use of the traffic in cident data or the RDS TMC network b your violation of this directive and or c any unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in connection herewith B Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor mational only User assumes a
211. ls or the desired cate gory 4 Select the desired channel Satellite radio a i 9 Snow Patrol V4 22 Chasing Cars All channels Sirius Hits 1 StarLite Sirius Love Movin EZ Via the buttons on the center console Press the button The next channel is selected Via direct channel entry 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 CY Select channel 4 Turn the controller until the desired channel is reached and press the controller Storing a channel 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 If necessary open All channels or the de sired category 4 Select the desired channel 177 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f 5 Press the controller again 6 Press the controller again to confirm the highlighted channel rz VA a Store 4 Store in presets 001 Sirius Hits 1 Store in favorites The Fray Over My Head Cable 7 Select the desired memory location The channels are stored for the remote control currently in use The channels can also be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons refer to page 23 Changing the list view The list view changes every time the first symbol on the navigation bar is pressed Information on the channel is displayed T Channel name A Artist Kn Track Selecting a category 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 K Category 4 Select the desired category Timeshift Approx one hour of the pr
212. ls or workmanship yn Minimum fuel grade 226 The use of poor quality fuels may result in drive ability starting and stalling problems especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude Should you encounter driveability problems which you suspect could be related to the fuel you are using we recommend that you respond by switching to a recognized high quality brand such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier Detergent Gasoline Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in unscheduled maintenance bp BMW recommends BP fuels i Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Wheels and tires Tire inflation pressure Safety information The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres sure influence the following gt The service life of the tires gt Road safety gt Driving comfort Checking the pressure Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold This means after driving no more than 1 25 miles 2 km or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours When the tires are warm the tire inflation pressure is higher Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and correct it as needed at least twice a month and before a long trip If you fail to observe this precaution you may be driving on tires with in correct tire pressures a condition that may not only
213. matic recirculated air control recircu lated air mode 15 Cooling function 16 Rear window defroster 17 ALL program 18 Active seat ventilation left side 51 19 Seat heating left side 50 gt Footwell gt Windows and footwell driver s side only Windows upper body region and footwell driver s side only If the windows are fogged over press the AUTO button on the driver s side to utilize the conden sation sensor Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Temperature Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible if necessary with the maximum cooling or heating capacity and then keeps it constant Avoid rapidly switching between different tem perature settings The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature AUTO program Press the button Air volume air distribution and tempera ture are controlled automatically Depending on the selected temperature AUTO intensity and outside influences the air is di rected to the windshield side windows upper body and into the footwell The cooling function refer to page 130 is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro gram At the same time a condensation sensor con trols the program so as to prevent window con densation as much as possible Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program switched on
214. ment refer to GF Music search Genre All genres page 140 All artists r l _ All albums Music collection i Start play Open Options f New search Music data import export Import music USB 5 Select the desired entry Import export USB gt Select A Z search refer to page 24 and input the desired entry Dap WD Import music USB 1 Music collection management gt Select the desired entry from the list Backup music on USB E 6 Select other categories if you wish Restore music from USB The tracks found are listed in alphabetical order al E iad he O G Not all categories need to be selected For example to search for all tracks by a certain artist call up that artist only All of the tracks Playing music by that artist are then displayed 7 Start play The list of tracks is repeated automatically E All tracks for which additional information has been stored can be accessed by the music search Tracks without additional information can be called up via the corresponding album refer to page 190 1 CD Multimedia Instructions for the voice activation system re 2 Music collection fer to page 25 New search iP Press the button on the steering wheel 189 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 CD multimedia pe MURIC Seale 1 CD Multimedia 3 Open the desired category e g Select a tiyusiecolection art
215. ments 2 gt Equipment version with full preparation package mobile phone gt An Emergency Request can be made even if no mobile phones are paired with the ve hicle BMW Assist is activated refer to page 218 gt The radio ready state is switched on The BMW Assist system is functional and logged into a wireless communications net work gt The emergency call system is functional Only use Emergency Request in an emergency Emergency Request not guaranteed For technical reasons the Emergency Re quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable conditions lt Service contract gt After your contract with BMW Assist has ex pired the BMW Assist system can be deac tivated by the service center without you having to visit a workshop gt 246 After deactivation an Emergency Request is no longer possible The system can be reactivated by a service center after you sign a new contract Initiating an Emergency Request Press the cover briefly to open it Press the SOS button until the LED in the button lights up The LED lights up an Emergency Request was initiated If the situation allows wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been estab lished The LED flashes if the connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been es tablished After the Emergency Request arrives at the BMW Assist Response Center the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps
216. n Close the windows and glass sunroof Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and raises fuel consumption Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and if necessary correct the tire inflation pressure refer to page 227 at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear Drive away without delay Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary Start driving right away but at moderate engine speeds This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Look well ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces fuel consumption Use coasting conditions When approaching a red light take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt On a downhill gradient take your foot off the ac celerator and let the vehicle roll The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting Switch off the engine during longer stops Switch off the engine during longer stops e g at traffic lights railroad crossings or in traffic congestion e Q te m Fuel savings are achieved af
217. n structions on the Control Display What to do if gt Thecurrenttransmission position cannot be displayed The vehicle is located in an unrecognized region is in a poor reception area or the system is currently determining the posi tion Reception is usually best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky gt Thedestination without street information is not used for route guidance When city has been input no downtown can be determined Input any street in the selected city and start destination guidance O S Z gt The destination is not used for route guid ance The destination data is not contained in the navigation data Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original gt Letters for destination input cannot be se lected The stored data do not contain the data of the destination Select a goal that is as close as possible to the original gt The map view is shown in shades of gray When the traffic situation gray card is acti vated the view on the Control Display is switched over to shades of gray This ena bles a better view of the traffic bulletins gt Spoken instructions are no longer output during route guidance in front of intersec tions The area has not yet been fully recorded or you have left the recommended route and 167 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Navigation the system requires a few seconds
218. n object depends on the temperature difference between the object and the background and on the level of heat radiation emitted by the object Objects that are similar in temperature to the environment or that radiate very little heat are difficult to detect 123 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 i O tien shad O O Driving comfort Pedestrian detection Warm objects that are similar in shape to human beings are detected by the system People detected by the system are displayed with a slight yellow hue Under good ambient conditions the pedestrian detection system operates within a range of ap prox 50 ft 15 m to approx 330 ft 100 m Warning of people in danger If the system detects a person in a defined area in front of the vehicle and if a collision with this person is imminent a warning symbol appears in the Control Display and Head up Display The warning area in front of the vehicle is divided into two areas gt Central area 1 directly in front of the vehicle 124 gt Expanded area 2 to the right and left The entire area moves along with the vehicle in the direction of the steering angle and changes with the vehicle speed As the vehicle speed in creases the area becomes longer and wider for example This symbol is displayed when a person is detected in the central area arrow 1 immediately in front of the vehicle This symbol is displayed when a pe
219. n roads Even at temperatures above 37 F 3 C there can be a risk of ice on roads 19 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 a O m J O O Displays Therefore drive carefully on bridges and shady Engine oil temperature roads for example to avoid the increased dan ger of an accident lt Time 7 vy The time is displayed at the bot N tom of the instrument cluster Ea Setting the time and time format refer to page 80 Date gt Cold engine the pointer is at the low tem The date is displayed in the in perature end Drive at moderate engine and strument cluster vehicle speeds hoop 05 29 08 Setting the date and date format gt Normal operating temperature the pointer refer to page 80 is in the middle or in the right half of the tem perature display Tachometer gt Hot engine the pointer is at the high tem perature end Switch off the engine imme diately and allow it to cool down Check the oil level refer to page 236 Current fuel consumption Displays the current fuel con sumption You can check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmen tally friendly manner Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field In this range the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine Displaying the current fuel consumption Coolant temperature 1 Settings Should the coolant and with it the engine be 2 Info dis
220. n that will give you complete control of your vehicle All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety comfort and convenience are described here Opening and closing Opening and closing Remote control key Buttons on the remote control Unlocking Locking Opening the small tailgate mh WON Panic mode headlamp courtesy delay fea ture opening the large tailgate General information The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls with keys Every remote control contains a replaceable battery The settings called up and implemented when the vehicle is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the vehicle Personal Profile refer to page 33 In addition information about service require ments is stored in the remote control Service data in the remote control refer to page 238 32 Integrated key Press the button on the back of the remote con trol arrow 1 and pull out the key arrow 2 The integrated key fits the following locks gt Driver s door gt Storage compartment in the front center armrest The storage compartment contains a switch for separately securing the tailgate refer to page 41 Replacing the battery 1 Take the integrated key out of the remote control 2 Push in the catch with the key arrow 1 3 Remove the cover of the battery compart ment see arrow 2 4 Insert a battery of the same type with the pos
221. n the DVD slot are flashing otherwise the CD DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged Do not continue to push on the CD DVD this may cause it to jam and prevent it from being able to eject again lt Filling all empty DVD compartments eee Hold the button down 185 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 CD multimedia The LEDs on the empty CD compartments flash 2 Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flash and then insert a CD or DVD into the center The CDs DVDs are drawn in automatically and placed into the vacant compartments Sliding in CDs DVDs Do not insert the CD DVD until the LEDs on the DVD slot are flashing otherwise the CD DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged Do not continue to push on the CD DVD this may cause it to jam and prevent it from being able to eject again lt After they are inserted it may take several mi nutes for the CDs DVDs to be read in Removing a single CD DVD 1 Press the button 2 Select the DVD compartment The CD DVD is partially ejected 3 Remove the CD DVD Removing all CDs DVDs 1 Hold the button down 2 Remove the CDs DVDs Malfunctions If all LEDs on the DVD changer are flashing rap idly a malfunction has occurred To eliminate the malfunction 1 Press one of the buttons i i The CD DVD last inserted is ejected 2 Remove the CD DVD The DVD changer is functional again after the LEDs stop flashing rapi
222. n the center armrest between the front seats This can be used to connect an external audio device such as a CD or MP3 player gt AUX IN port refer to page 192 gt USB audio interface refer to page 193 Rear A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the seats Press the buttons next to the lock 141 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Storage compartments Folding down a Pull on the opener and fold the armrest forward Opening Storage compartment in the rear center arm rest Storage compartment in the center console To open press the button Cupholders Notes Shatter proof containers and no hot drinks Use light and shatter proof containers and do not transport hot drinks Otherwise there is the increased danger of injury in an accident Unsuitable containers Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain ers into the cupholders This may result in dam age lt To open press on the cover Rear In the front center armrest To open press the button Clothes hooks The clothes hooks are located next to the grab handles in the rear and on the door pillar in the rear Do not obstruct view When suspending clothing from the hooks ensure that it will not obstruct the driver s vision No heavy objects Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks otherwise they may present a danger to pas sengers during braki
223. nal Profile 33 Kickdown automatic trans mission 73 Knee airbag 90 L Lamp replacement 240 Lamp replacement front 241 Lamp replacement rear 242 Lamps 86 Lamps and bulbs 240 Lane departure warning 97 Lane margin warning 97 Language on Control Dis play 81 Lashing eyes securing cargo 149 LATCH child restraint fixing system 62 Leather care 252 LEDs light emitting di odes 240 Length vehicle 257 Letters and numbers enter ing 24 License plate lamp bulb re placement 242 Light alloy wheels care 252 Light control 87 Light emitting diodes LEDs 240 Lighter front 136 Lighting 86 Lighting via remote con trol 36 Light switch 86 Load 149 Loading 148 Loading position 139 Lock door 37 Locking unlocking from in side 38 Locking unlocking via door lock 37 Locking unlocking with re mote control 35 Locking automatic 38 Locking central 35 Locking via tailgate 39 Lock power window 45 Locks doors and win dows 64 Low beams 86 Low beams automatic refer to High beam assistant 88 Lower back support 50 Lug bolt lock 244 Luggage compartment lid 38 Luggage rack refer to Roof mounted luggage rack 149 Lumbar support 50 M Maintenance 238 Maintenance require ments 238 Maintenance service require ments 82 Maintenance system BMW 238 Malfunction displays refer to Check Control 83 Malfunction self leveling sus pension 103 Manual air distribution 128 Manual
224. nder certain environmen tal or topographic conditions The satellite radio has no influence on this gt The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages next to tall buildings or near trees mountains or other powerful sources of radio interference S S e2 40 p q Driving tips NEEL OIA Communication Entertainment Mobility 5 cc pes oO Tajm oO aa Radio Stored stations General information It is possible to store up to 40 stations Calling up a station 1 Radio 2 Presets 3 Select the desired station Storing a station The station currently selected is stored Radio 2 Presets Store station i GS Presets Store station 1 Hit Radio 2 Classic Radio 3 Chart Radio 4 News Radio 4 Select the desired memory location The list of stored stations is stored for the re mote control currently in use The stations can also be stored on the program mable memory buttons refer to page 23 Deleting a station 1 Radio 2 Presets 3 Select the desired station 4 Open Options 5 Delete entry 180 f Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 CD multimedia Controls n pee oE Change the entertainment source CD DVD drive Eject CD DVD Change station track Programmable memory buttons O 0O A WN Volume on off CD DVD CD DVD playback Loading the CD DVD p
225. ng wheel as you may lose control of the vehicle gt On the LED lights up The system may not be fully functional in the gt Off the LED goes out following situations The system can issue warnings atspeeds above gt In heavy fog rain or snowfall approx 40 mph 65 km h gt Inthe event of worn poorly visible merging The state is stored for the remote control cur diverging or multiple lines such as in con rently in use struction areas gt Whenlanelines are covered in snow ice dirt or water gt In tight curves or on narrow lanes 97 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Safety gt When the lines are covered by objects When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you When driving toward bright lights gt When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over dirty or cov ered with stickers etc Malfunctions Steering wheel vibration Frequent activation of the steering wheel vibra tion causes the system to overheat This causes the lane departure warning to be come deactivated Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressing the button Camera The camera is located on the front of the interior rearview mirror Keep the area in front of the interior rearview mirror clear 98 Active Blind Spot Detection The concept Two radar sensors below the rear bumper mon itor the area behind and next to the vehicle at speeds
226. ng thoroughly with soap and water Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly Your vehicle is covered by the fol lowing warranties gt New Vehicle Limited Warranty gt Rust Perforation Limited Warranty gt Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Notes gt Federal Emissions Performance Warranty gt California Emission Control System Limited Warranty Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is op erated under those conditions If you wish to op erate your vehicle in another country or region you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limita tions or exclusions for such country or region In such case please contact Customer Relations for further information Reporting safety defects For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US If you believe that your vehicle has a defect whi
227. ng and evasive maneu vers 142 l Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Storage compartments in the trunk Retaining straps Retaining straps on the left and right side trim for fastening small objects Multi function hook There are two multi function hooks on the trunk walls 1 Open the holder by pressing on the button 2 Press the bag handle into the holder from above Light and suitable objects only Only hang light bags or suitable objects from the holders Otherwise there is a danger of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has been appropriately secured lt Storage compartments in the floor The trunk cover refer to page 137 can be stowed in the rear compartment To open the cover pull upward on the handle arrow 1 To close the cover press downward until it locks You can fix the cover in an upright position if needed To do so unhook the right hand retain ing strap and hook it into the rear of the cover Do not stow heavy objects Only stow light objects in the rear com partment otherwise damage may occur lt C 2 Da Jad e S To open reach into the recess and raise the handle arrow 2 The cover can be completely removed Lashing eyes To secure cargo refer to page 149 with nets or draw straps the trunk is fitted with lashing eyes 143 Online Edition for Pa
228. nline Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 a O m J O O Driving comfort Measurement Measurements are made by ultrasound sensors in the bumpers The range is approx 6 ft 2 m An acoustic warning is first given gt By the front sensors and two rear corner sensors at approx 24 in 60 cm gt By the rear middle sensors at approx 5 ft 1 50 m System limits Check the traffic situation as well PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the driver s personal judgment of the traffic situa tion Check the traffic situation around the vehi cle with your own eyes Otherwise an accident could result from road users or objects located outside of the PDC detection range Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle may prevent you from hearing the PDC s signal tone lt Avoid driving quickly with PDC Avoid approaching an object quickly Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet active For technical reasons the system may other wise be too late in issuing a warning lt Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects can reach the physical limits of ultrasonic measurement for instance gt With tow bars and trailer hitches gt With thin or wedge shaped objects gt With low objects gt With objects with corners and sharp edges Low objects already displayed e g curbs can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds Hig
229. not use abrasive or caustic cleansers gt o gt Soak areas that have been soiled e g due to insects with shampoo and wash off with water 251 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Q Sen O gt Thaw ice with de icing spray do not use an ice scraper After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle apply the brakes briefly to dry them otherwise braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur Vehicle care Car care products BMW recommends using cleaning and care products from BMW since these have been tested and approved Car care and cleaning products Follow the instructions on the container When cleaning the interior open the doors or windows Only use products intended for cleaning vehi cles Cleansers can contain substances that are dan gerous and harmful to your health Vehicle paint Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention Environmental influences can act on the vehicle paint Tailor the frequency and extent of your car care to these influences Leather care Remove dust from the leather often using a cloth or vacuum cleaner Otherwise particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface To guard against discoloration such as from clothing provide leather care roughly every two months Clean ligh
230. nter address Select Street or the displayed street Change to the list of street names aoe eh S In the displayed state province Q In BEVERLY HILLS CA In UNITED STATES MUSAUSSTRASSE MUSENBERGSTRASSE 1l MUSEUMSINSEL MUSPELHEIMSTRASSE MUSPILLISTRASSE Select the letters 7 Change to the list of street names Highlight the street With the Professional navigation system A preview map is displayed on the split screen 9 Select the street Starting destination guidance after entering the destination 1 Accept destination 2 Start guidance or Add as another dest gt Adjusting Route preference refer to page 162 gt Searching Points of Interest at loc refer to page 157 Address book Selecting a destination from the address book 1 Navigation 2 Address book contacts with addresses are displayed if these have been checked as destinations If the mobile phone does not display the contacts with addresses they must first be At a glance V e J je O Driving tips Navigation Communication Entertainment Y O D Soom 2 O aa checked as a destination refer to 2 Open Options page 214 3 Store position as contact or Add position E i Navigation to contact Zieleingabe Adressbuch Switch off control display Letzte Ziele Address book Display Owner s Manual Navigation Store position as con
231. ntries must be entered using voice activa tion and are separate from the memory in the mobile phone Up to 50 entries can be set up Saving an entry 1 Save name 2 Say the name Do not exceed the speaking duration of approx 2 seconds 3 Say the phone number after being prompted to do so by the system 4 Save Deleting an entry 1 Delete names 2 Say the name after being prompted to do so 3 Confirm the query with Yes Deleting all entries 1 Delete phone book The dialog for deleting the phone book is opened 2 Confirm the query with Yes 3 Confirm the query again with gt Yes Reading and selecting entries 1 Read phone book The dialog for reading the phone book is opened 2 Say Dial number when the desired entry is read Selecting an entry 1 Dial name 2 Say the name after being prompted to do so 3 Confirm the query with Yes Adjusting the volume Turn the knob during an announcement gt The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed gt The volume is stored for the remote control currently in use Notes Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request In stressful situations the voice and vocal pitch can change This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel ephone connection pad x E E O O Instead use the SOS button refer to page 246 in the vicinity of
232. nts refer to page 55 gt Airbags refer to page 90 Front seats Adjusting Do not adjust the seat while driving Never attempt to adjust the driver s seat while driving The seat could respond with unexpected move ment and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident lt Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear Do not incline the backrest on the front passen ger side too far to the rear during driving Oth erwise there is the danger of sliding under the safety belt in an accident This would eliminate the protection normally provided by the belt lt At a glance partially powered seats 1 Thigh support 2 Tilt 3 Forward backward 4 Lumbar support 5 Height 6 Backrest Adjustments in detail partially powered seats Forward back Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction After releasing the lever move the seat forward or back slightly to make sure it engages prop erly Seat tilt Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired tilt After releasing the lever apply your weight to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat en gages properly 48 l Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Height Move the button in the required direction 2 O m J O O Backrest tilt Move the button in the required direction P Lumbar support Backrest width Shoulder support Backrest Forward back height til
233. o 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites list Available favorites are artist track game league and team Storing the artist track or game It is only possible to store favorites that are cur rently being broadcast The channel information must be available Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 If necessary open All channels or the de sired category 4 Select the desired channel 5 Press the controller again 6 Select the artist track or game Storing the league or team Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites from a selection list 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 Manage favorites 4 Add sports information w Favorites EY Activate alert ah Artists EY The Fray fa Titles EY Proud Mary 1969 LY Livin On A Prayer 1987 Add sports information 5 Select the league 6 Select Add all teams or the desired team 178 i Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Opening the favorites If an activated favorite is played back the fol lowing message appears for approx 20 sec onds Favorite alert Ye Favorites Select the symbol while the message is shown Satellite radio tr Favorite alert JI Proud Mary 1969 All Channels _ 001 Seed Favorites StarLite f 003 Sirius Love F 004 Movin EZ The displayed favorite is played If there is no message the system changes to the My Favorites category All favorites currently being broa
234. o protrude into the area of pedal movement and impair pedal operation lt Brake disc corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination on the brake pads are furthered by gt Lowmileage gt Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all gt Infrequent use of the brakes Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure that must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the discs is not reached Should corrosion form on the brake discs the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef fect that generally cannot be corrected Condensation under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control con densation water develops that exits underneath the vehicle Therefore traces of condensed water under the vehicle are normal Loading rN Overloading the vehicle 148 To avoid exceeding the approved carrying ca pacity of the tires never overload the vehicle Overloading can lead to overheating and in creases the rate at which damage develops in side the tires This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure No fluids in the trunk Make sure that fluids do not leak into the trunk otherwise the vehicle may be dam aged lt Determining the load limit 1 Locate the following statement on your ve hicle s placard gt The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs Otherwise damage to the ve hicle and unstable
235. o the left right For Rear seat entertainment Professional Switch over between the display screens The transmission time of the remote control is limited by law To execute a function again press or turn the required button again Replacing the batteries No rechargeable batteries Do not use rechargeable batteries as damage may result from the substances in the batteries 1 Remove the cover Press on the cover ar row 1 and push forward arrow 2 2 Insert batteries of the same type 3 Close the cover Ry Takethe used battery toa recycling cen EY ter or to your service center Controls Almost all functions can be operated in the same manner as they are in the front Special features of operating the system in the rear are described here 197 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 c e3 4 J Eel e3 c LL Rear entertainment Audio video playback Audio Audio can be played back via rear entertainment from any source in the vehicle Operation is the same as for the front audio play back refer to page 181 Video Video can be played back in the rear from the following sources gt DVD changer gt Rear CD DVD player gt External device in rear If a video image is being played back in the rear the rear CD DVD player cannot be selected in the front Operation is the same as for the front video play back refer to page 183 Radio
236. oading position Press the button The seat moves for i ward and the backrest moves to the ba sic position Comfortable seating is still possible although knee clearance is reduced Basic position Press and hold the button until the seat stops automatically in its basic position Operation of the rear backrest was deactivated After a brief period operation of the rear back rest is deactivated to save battery power To reactivate operation gt Open or close a door or the tailgate gt Press a button on the remote control gt Press the Start Stop button Folding down the trunk partition 1 Fold the rear seat backrest forward 138 f Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 2 Torelease the trunk partition pull the cor 2 To release the cargo cover pull both levers responding lever in the trunk The trunk par in the trunk The cargo cover folds into an tition folds forward upright position and rests against the rear backrest A rs Le pe e O Fold back the cargo cover and snap into place Ski and snowboard bag General information The ski and snowboard bag is contained ina protective jacket in the trunk Press the opener toward the left Follow the installation and operation instruc tions included in the protective jacket Folding back and engaging the trunk partition Danger of pinching Make sure that the path of the cargo cover is clear when folding it b
237. od facing and fine wood compo nents only with a moist rag Then dry with a soft cloth Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Plastic components These include gt Headliner gt Lamp lenses gt Instrument cluster cover gt Matte black spray coated components Clean with a microfiber cloth Moisten the cloth lightly and use plastic cleanser if necessary Do not soak the headliner Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or sol vents such as lacquer thinners heavy duty grease removers fuel or such this could lead to surface damage lt Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety Chemical cleaning Do not clean chemically this can destroy the webbing lt Use only a mild soapy solution with the safety belts clipped into their buckles Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts until they are dry Carpets and floor mats Floor mats can be removed from the passenger compartment for cleaning If they are very dirty clean with a microfiber cloth and water or an interior cleaner To prevent mat ting of the carpet rub back and forth in the di rection of travel only Sensors cameras To clean the sensors or cameras of equipment such as the High beam Assistant Active Cruise Control or Night Vision use a cloth moistened with a small amount of gla
238. of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled lt 72 All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser voir Fill with water and if required with a washer antifreeze according to the manufacturer s rec ommendations Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain the correct mixing ratio Capacity approx 5 3 US quarts 5 liters Automatic transmission with Steptronic Transmission positions D Drive automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation All for ward gears are available R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary N is Neutral Use in automatic car washes for example The vehicle can roll When the ignition is switched off refer to page 65 position P is engaged automatically P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary The drive wheels are blocked P is engaged automatically gt After the engine is switched off if the car is in radio ready state refer to page 65 or if the Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 ignition is switched off refer to page 65 and if position R or D is engaged gt If the ignition is switched off and position N is engaged gt If the vehicle is standing with position R or D engaged and you unfasten the belt of the driver s seat and open the driver s door Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance Press on the accelerator beyond the resistance point at the full thr
239. ogram being broad cast on the channel currently being listened to is stored ina buffer Prerequisite the signal must be available The stored audio track can be played with a de lay following the live broadcast When the buffer is full the older tracks are overwritten The buf fer is cleared when a new channel is selected At a glance Controls Driving tips NEEL OIA a z S ed thee ed LLI Communication Mobility Reference Radio Opening the timeshift function 1 Radio 2 Satellite radio 3 Replay Time shift 3 2 Snow Patrol fi Chasing Cars D gt The red arrow shows the current playback position gt The time difference to the live broadcast is displayed next to the buffer bar For live transmissions live Timeshift menu Go to the live broadcast gt Playback pause DO Next track K Previous track gt Fast forward J Reverse AD y Automatic timeshift deactivated ac tivated Automatic timeshift When the function is activated audio playback is stopped automatically in the event of gt Incoming and outgoing telephone calls gt Activation of the voice activation system gt Muting The audio playback then continues with a time delay To activate Radio Satellite radio Replay Time shift D Automatic time shift To deactivate y Automatic time shift a ee a Storing favorites Up t
240. ol refer to page 103 Dynamic Drive The concept Dynamic Drive reduces the lateral inclination of the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in curves or during quick evasive maneuvers Driving stability and driving comfort are in creased under all driving conditions The system utilizes active stabilizer bars on the front and rear axles that react immediately to all driving situa tions Programs The system offers two different programs The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv ing Control refer to page 103 SPORT Sporty tuning for greater driving agility NORMAL Comfort oriented tuning for optimal comfort Dynamic Damping Control The concept This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav eling on uneven road surfaces The system enhances driving dynamics and comfort as required for the road surface and driving style Programs The system offers three different programs The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv ing Control refer to page 103 102 SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the shock absorb ers for greater driving agility NORMAL Balanced tuning between the COMFORT and SPORT programs COMFORT Comfort oriented tuning of the shock absorbers for optimal traveling comfort Integral Active Steering The concept Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac tive Steering and rear axle steering Active Steering var
241. ollection The entire music collection can be stored on a USB device Make sure there is enough free memory capacity on the USB device Depending on the number of tracks backing up the music collection may take several hours Therefore it is best to perform the backup dur ing a long trip 1 Starting the engine 2 Connect the USB device to the USB inter face in the glove compartment refer to page 140 CD Multimedia Music collection Open Options app p Music data import export Display Owner s Manual Free memory Delete music collection CD Multimedia Select rear source O Random Music data import export At a glance Controls Q Ez D a m NEEL OIA Entertainment Communication Mobility eb S G Ge 0 ad CD multimedia 7 Backup music on USB G Import export USB Import music USB Music collection management Backup music on USB Restore music from USB Storing the music collection in the vehicle When storing from the USB device the existing music collection in the vehicle is replaced CD Multimedia Music collection 1 2 3 Open Options 4 Music data import export 5 Restore music from USB Deleting the music collection 1 CD Multimedia 2 Music collection 3 Open Options 4 Delete music collection External devices At a glance r4 AUX IN port Se USB audio interface mobi
242. ons the alarm system refer to page 42 is triggered if the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock Unlock the vehicle using the remote control to switch off the alarm Convenient operation The door lock can be used to simultaneously operate the windows and the glass sunroof Ata glance Ly e Le a e O Driving tips NEEL OIA Communication Entertainment Mobility S es oO Taje oO aa Opening and closing Opening closing With the door closed turn the key to the Unlock or Lock position and hold it there Turning the key back to the original position stops the motion Monitor the closing process Monitor the closing process to ensure that no one becomes trapped otherwise injuries may result Manual operation If an electrical malfunction occurs lock or unlock the vehicle using a key via the door lock on the driver s door Opening and closing from the inside Locking and unlocking Press the button in the vehicle The doors and the tailgate are locked or unlocked when the front doors are closed but they are not secured against theft The fuel filler flap remains unlocked You can set how the vehicle should be unlocked refer to Unlocking refer to page 35 Automatic locking The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use 1 Settings 2 Door locks 3 Select the desired function gt Lock if no door is opened
243. onsumption route dis tance and temperature 1 Settings 2 Language Units 3 Select the desired menu item m q Jaa F Language Units Deutsch Default V100 km Language Speech mode Consumption Distance Temperature 4 Select the desired unit The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Brightness Setting the brightness To set the brightness of the Control Display 1 Settings 2 Control display 81 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Displays 3 Brightness amp Control display Brightness 4 Turn the controller until the desired bright ness is set 5 Press the controller The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Depending on the light conditions the bright ness control may not be clearly visible Service requirements Display Y _ The driving distance or the time XY to the next service is displayed is __ briefly after the ignition is _ switched on The current service require ments can be read out from the remote control by the service specialist Data regarding the maintenance status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto matically transmitted to your service center be fore a service due date Automatic Service Re quest refer to page 217 Detailed information on service requirements More information on the scope of service re quired can be di
244. ontacts My contacts gt My contacts Opening the contacts gt Contacts New contact New contact BMW Assist Opening BMW Assist gt B M W Assist Opening BMW Search gt B M W Search Vehicle information Owner s Manual Opening the Owner s Manual Display Owner s Manuak Opening the Quick Reference Quick reference Opening the keyword search gt Owner s Manuak Opening Search by pictures Search by pictures Computer Opening the computer gt Onboard info Opening the trip computer gt Trip computer 264 f Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Opening the vehicle information Vehicle info Opening the vehicle status Vehicle status Adjusting Vehicle Opening the main menu Main menu Opening the settings Settings Opening the options gt Options Info display of the instrument cluster gt Info Display Central display settings gt Control display Opening the time and date settings gt Time and date Opening the language and unit settings Language and units Opening the speed limit settings Speeck Opening the light settings Lighting lt Opening the door lock settings Door locks Opening the profiles Profiles Equipment Opening the air conditioning settings Climate Opening the Head up Display settings head up display Enabling the rear seat Allow rear controk 265 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 1
245. ontinuous tone is sounded If objects are located both in front of and behind the vehicle an alternating continuous signal is sounded The intermittent tone is interrupted after approx 3 seconds gt Ifthe vehicle stops in front of an object that is detected by only one of the corner sen sors gt If moving parallel to a wall The signal tone is switched off gt When the vehicle moves away from an ob ject by more than approx 4 in 10 cm gt When transmission position P is engaged Volume You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone refer to page 173 The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control Dis play before a signal tone sounds 117 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control PDC is activated Depending on the vehicle s equipment the screen mask can also be turned by 90 If the backup camera image was selected last it again appears on the display To switch to PDC 1 Ry Rear view camera Select the symbol on the Control Display 2 Press the controller The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Zoom view On the left part of the display screen the vehicle is shown enlarged 3 gt Transmission position D enga
246. oor locks Unlock button All doors Last seat position auto Lock if no door is opened Lock after start to drive Acoustic sig lock unlock m O O O Flash when lock unlock 4 Select the desired function gt Driver s door only Only the driver s door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked Pressing again un locks the entire vehicle gt All doors The entire vehicle is unlocked Convenient opening The remote control can be used to simultane ously open the windows and the glass sunroof of The windows and the glass sunroof open Press and hold the button on the re mote control Releasing the button stops the motion Locking Press the button on the remote control Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there are people in it as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge lt Switching on the interior lamps courtesy lamps and welcome lamps Press the button on the remote control 1 36 with the vehicle locked Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation Press the button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds o gt To switch off the alarm press any button Switching on the headlamp courtesy delay feature Briefly press the button on the remote control The duration refer to page 86 can be set in the Control Display
247. or amic glass sunroof 45 Glove compartment 140 GPS navigation refer to Navi gation system 154 Gross vehicle weight ap proved 258 Gross weight permissible for trailer towing 258 H Hand brake refer to Parking brake 66 Hand held transmitter alter nating code 135 Hazard warning flashers 246 HD Radio 175 Head airbags 90 Headlamp control auto matic 87 Headlamp courtesy delay fea ture 86 Headlamp courtesy delay fea ture via remote control 36 Headlamp flasher 70 Headlamp glass 241 Headlamps 241 Headlamps care 251 Headlamp washer system 70 Headliner 18 Headphones rear entertain ment 199 Head restraints 48 Head restraints front 55 Head restraints rear 56 Head up Display 126 Head up Display care 253 Heavy cargo stowing 149 Height seats 48 Height with roof mounted aer ial vehicle 256 High beam assistant 88 High beams 70 High beams low beams refer to High beam assistant 88 Hills 147 Hill start assistant refer to Drive off assistant 106 Holder for beverages 142 Homepage 6 Hood 234 Horn 12 Hotel function tailgate 41 Hot exhaust system 146 House number entering for navigation 155 HUD Head up Display 126 Hydroplaning 147 iBrake collision warning 112 Ice warning refer to External temperature warning 75 Icy roads refer to External temperature warning 75 Identification marks tires 229 Identification number refer to Engine compartment 234 iDrive 19
248. or Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Taking traffic obstructions into consideration 1 Navigation 2 Traffic Info 3 First the traffic bulletins on the planned route are displayed The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order of their distance from the current vehicle position 4 Select Recomm detour if necessary Dynamic guidance is activated automati Cally Navigation data Information on navigation data 1 Navigation 2 Open Options 3 Navigation system version information is displayed on the data version Updating the navigation data General information Navigation data and authorization codes are available from your service center Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be up dated gt Depending on the data volume a data up date may take several hours Update during the trip to preserve battery gt The basic navigation is available during the trip gt The status of the update can be queried in the options menu The system restarts after the update gt The data carrier with the navigation data can be removed after the update is complete Professional navigation system Perform the update 1 Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD player with the labeled side facing up 2 Follow the instructions on the Control Dis play 3 Enter the authorization code of the naviga tion DVD and change the DVD if needed After an interruption of the trip follow the i
249. or lock gt Via the door handles gt Via the button on the tailgate The following takes place simultaneously when locking unlocking the vehicle via the remote control gt Anti theft protection is switched on off Doors cannot be unlocked using the lock buttons or the door opener gt The welcome lamps interior lamps and courtesy lamps are switched on and off gt The alarm system refer to page 42 is armed or disarmed Operating from the inside ki O m J O O Via the button for the central locking system If the vehicle has been locked from inside the fuel filler flap remains unlocked If an accident of a certain severity occurs the central locking system unlocks automatically The hazard warning system and interior lamps come on Opening and closing from the outside Using the remote control General information Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in side Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside lt Unlocking Press the button The vehicle is unlocked You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked 35 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Opening and closing The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use 1 Settings 2 Door locks 3 Unlock button D
250. ormation can be displayed on the right side of the split screen e g information from the computer In the divided screen view the so called split screen this information remains visible even when you change to another menu Switching the split screen on and off a Press the button 2 Split screen Selecting the display Press the button 1 2 Split screen 3 Move the controller until the split screen is selected 4 Split screen content 5 Select the desired menu item Split screen content EY Split screen Map facing north Map direction of travel Map view with perspective Position v Onboard info Trip computer 23 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f Programmable memory buttons General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons and called up di rectly e g radio stations navigation destina tions phone numbers and entry points into the menu The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use Saving a function 1 Highlight the function via the iDrive 2 g i Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds Running a function Press the button l The function will run immediately This means for example that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected Displaying the button assignment Use a finger to touch the buttons Do not wear gloves or use objects The key assignment i
251. ory button of the universal remote control for an extended period If the LED flashes rapidly for a brief period and then lights up continuously for approx 2 sec onds the hand held transmitter is equipped 5 Press the button on the receiver of the de vice to be set You have approx 30 seconds for the next step 6 Press the programmed memory button of the universal remote control three times The device can be operated when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on with an alternating code system In this case program the memory buttons as described under Alternating code hand held transmitters Alternating code hand held transmitters Please obtain information on synchronizing the device in the operating manual of the device be ing set up Programming will be easier with the aid of a sec ond person 1 Park the vehicle within range of the remote controlled device Program the universal remote control as de scribed above under Fixed code hand held transmitters Press and hold the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror for approx 5 sec onds until the device to be adjusted is acti vated If the device does not become activated press and hold the button and watch the LED gt Ifthe LED lights up continuously the programming Is completed The device should become activated when the but ton is pressed briefly gt Ifthe LED flashes for approx 2 seconds and then lights
252. other po sition in the list gt Delete dest in the trip With the Professional navigation system Deleting a trip 1 Stored trips 2 Highlight the desired trip 3 Open Options 4 Delete all trips or Delete trip Destination guidance Starting destination guidance 1 Navigation 2 Make a destination entry refer to page 154 Accept destination Start guidance The route is shown on the Control Display y y m amp The distance to the destination intermedi ate destination and the estimated time of ar rival are displayed in the map view gt The arrow display is shown in the instrument panel and on the Control Display if neces sary Terminating destination guidance 1 Navigation 2 Map 3 amp Select the symbol 4 Stop guidance Continuing destination guidance If the destination was not reached during the last trip destination guidance can be resumed Resume guidance eb S amp e Po q Controls Driving tips Navigation Communication Entertainment oO 5 oO a oO aa Navigation Route criteria General information gt The route calculated can be influenced by selecting certain criteria gt The route criteria can be changed when the destination is entered and during destina tion guidance gt Road types are part of the navigation data and are taken into consideration when plan ning a route e
253. ottle position Engaging the transmission position gt Transmission position P can only be disen gaged if the engine is running and the brake pedal is pressed gt With the vehicle stationary press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N otherwise the shift command will not be executed shift lock Depress the brake until you start driv ing To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position maintain pres sure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start lt Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di rection beyond a resistance point if necessary After releasing the selector lever it returns to its center position Press the Unlock button to A rag J e Oo gt EngageR gt Shift out of P Press button P Sport program and manual mode M S Push the selector lever to the left out of trans mission position D DS is displayed in the instrument cluster This position is recommended for a perform ance oriented driving style 73 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Iving Dr Activating the M S manual mode Push the selector lever to the left out of trans mission position D Push the selector lever forward or backward Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster e g M1 gt To shift down press the selector lever for ward
254. ound the doors and the road area around the vehicle are shown on the Control Display for this purpose Capturing the image The image is captured by two cameras inte grated in the exterior mirrors and by the backup camera The range equals gt approx 10 ft 3 m to the side gt approx 7 ft 2 m to the rear In this way obstacles up to the height of the ex terior mirrors are detected early System limits Top View cannot be used in the following situa tions gt With a door open gt With the tailgate open gt With an exterior mirror folded in gt In poor light A Check Control message is displayed in some of these situations Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve hicle with your own eyes Otherwise an accident could result from road users or objects located outside the picture area of the cameras Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running The Top View and PDC images are displayed if the system is switched on via iDrive Switching off automatically The system switches off and the LED goes out gt After approx 160 ft 50 m when driving for ward Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 gt Above approx 22 mph 36 km h when driv ing forward Switch on the system again if necessary Switching on off manually Py Press the button gt On the LED lights up gt Off the LE
255. oving lt FN Frequent starting in quick succession 65 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Iving Dr Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting the car and avoid starting the car frequently in quick succession Otherwise the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned and there is the danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic con verter lt Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary Start driving at mod erate engine speeds Starting the engine Press on the brake pedal and START press the Start Stop button STOP The engine is cranked until it Starts Naw Engine stop General information Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children for example cannot operate the windows and injure them selves lt Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required Set the parking brake firmly when parking oth erwise the vehicle could roll On steep upward and downward inclines further secure the vehi cle for example by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb lt Switching off the engine 1 Engage transmission position P with the ve hicle stopped 2 Press the Start Stop button The engine is switched off The radio ready state is switched on 3 Set the parking brake Before driving into a car wash The vehicle is able to roll wh
256. play come too hot a warning message is displayed a g g play 3 Additional indicators Check the coolant level refer to page 237 e Info display LY Range consumption LY Range EY Distance to destination EY Arrival time EY Average consumption LY Average speed EY Date The bar display for the current fuel consumption is displayed in the instrument cluster 76 i Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Energy regeneration The energy of motion of the ve hicle is converted to electrical en ergy while coasting refer to page 151 The vehicle battery is partially charged and fuel con sumption can be lowered Fuel gauge f Gasoline engine Fuel capacity approx 18 5 US gal 70 liters The vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary Notes on refueling refer to page 224 A gt A message appears briefly gt The remaining range is shown on the computer The message appears continuously below a range of approx 30 miles 50 km Refuel promptly Refuel no later than at a range 30 miles 50 km or engine functions are not ensured and damage may occur lt Displaying the cruising range 1 Settings 2 Info display Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 3 Additional indicators GF Info display LY Range consumption LY Range LY Distance to destination GY Arrival time EY Average consumption LY Average speed bY Date The bar display
257. position data of your vehicle to the BMW Assist Response Cen ter if an Emergency Request is initiated Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi vidually agreed upon contract After your contract has expired the BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist Response Center without your having to visit a service center After the BMW Assist system has been deactivated no BMW Assist services will be available The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by a service center after you sign a new contract Requirements gt The installed BMW Assist system is logged in to a wireless communications network This network must be capable of transmit ting the services gt To transmit position data the vehicle must be able to determine the current position gt To activate and update BMW Assist a GPS signal must be available gt The BMW Assist service contract was signed with your service center or with the BMW Assist Response Center Enabling must have been completed gt BMW Assist is activated Services offered gt Emergency Request when you press the SOS button a connection to the BMW As sist Response Center is established The BMW Assist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you gt Automatic Collision Notification under cer tain conditions a connection is established to the BMW Assist Response Center after a 216 serious accident If possible the BMW As s
258. programs The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv ing Control refer to page 103 SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the Integral Active Steering for greater driving agility NORMAL Balanced tuning of the Integral Active Steering for optimal traveling comfort Malfunction In the event of a malfunction the steering wheel must be turned further while the vehicle re sponds more sensitively to steering wheel movements in the higher speed range The stability enhancing intervention may be de activated Proceed cautiously and drive defensively Have the system checked Self leveling suspension The concept The self leveling suspension keeps the vehicle height and ground clearance constant The height of the vehicle at the rear axle is main tained at a predefined level under all load con ditions The system ensures consistent comfort by keeping spring travel constant in all driving sit uations Malfunction A message appears on the Control Display A malfunction has occurred in the self leveling suspension Vehicle handling may be altered and driving comfort may be noticeably reduced Visit your nearest service center i O J O O Dynamic Driving Control The concept Dynamic Driving Control can be used to adjust the driving dynamics of the vehicle Several pro grams are available for this purpose they can be activated using the two Dynamic Driving Control buttons Operating t
259. r The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the incoming air Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 The activated charcoal filter removes gaseous pollutants from the outside air that enters the vehicle This combined filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance of your vehicle More information can be found in the service re quirements display refer to page 82 Ventilation Front ventilation gt Thumb wheels for adjusting the tempera ture arrows 1 Toward blue colder Toward red warmer gt Lever for changing the air flow direction ar row 2 gt Thumb wheels for opening and closing the vents continuously arrows 3 Ventilation levels gt Draft free ventilation Thumb wheel arrow 3 in level the air current is fanned out gt Maximum air volume Thumb wheel arrow 3 in level the air is partially fanned out and partially bundled This maximizes the air supply gt Direct ventilation Thumb wheel arrow 3 in level the air is bundled and can be directed to a specific point 131 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f Adjusting the ventilation gt Ventilation for cooling Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di rection e g if the vehicle interior is hot from the sun gt Draft free ventilation Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you Ventilation in rear center 1E gt Thumb wheels for
260. r vene and if there is the danger of a collision is accompanied by a braking intervention The braking intervention is executed with lim ited braking force and for a brief period only The intervention cannot bring the vehicle to a com plete standstill The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control refer to page 1071 is switched on Adapting your speed and driving style The acute warning does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 driving speed and style to the traffic condi tions The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov ing the steering wheel When towing or tow starting the vehicle switch off the collision warning with the braking func tion to prevent accidental interventions The braking function is deactivated if the DSC Dynamic Stability Control or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is deactivated Switching the warning function on off Press the button gt On the LED lights up gt Off the LED goes out The state is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Configuring the prewarning After the warning function is switched on the following can be set via the iDrive gt The prewarning can be switched on off gt The time of the prewarning can be set These settings have no effect on the time of the warning from th
261. r adjusting 51 Seat ventilation front 51 Seat ventilation rear 53 Selection list in instrument cluster 77 Selector lever automatic transmission 73 Self leveling suspension air suspension 103 Self leveling suspension mal function 103 Sensors care 253 Service and warranty 7 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Service requirements CBS Condition Based Serv ice 238 Service requirements dis play 82 Service Roadside Assis tance 247 Settings on Control Dis play 80 Settings storing for seat mir rors steering wheel 57 Shifting automatic transmis sion 72 Short commands 259 Shoulder support 50 Side airbags 90 Side View 122 Signaling horn 12 Signals when unlocking 37 Sitting safely 48 Size 256 Ski and snowboard bag 139 Slide tilt glass roof 45 Smallest turning circle 257 Smoker s package 136 Snap in adapter mobile phone 212 Snow chains 232 Socket 136 Socket OBD Onboard Diag nostics 238 Spare fuse 245 Special destinations naviga tion 157 Specified oil types 236 Speed limit detection 84 Speed limit setting 78 Speedometer 14 Split screen 23 Split screen map set tings 164 Spoken instructions naviga tion 163 SPORT program Dynamic Driving Control 104 SPORT program Dynamic Driving Control 104 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Sport program transmis sion 73 Stability control systems 101 Start Stop button 65
262. r al most completely Sliding visor with raised roof Do not use force to close the sliding visor as this may damage the mechanism lt Opening closing the sliding visor gt Press the switch in the de sired direction to the resist ance point and hold it there The sliding visor moves while the switch is being held gt Press the switch in the desired direction past the resistance point 46 The sliding visor moves automatically Pressing the switch again stops the motion Opening closing the glass sunroof When the sliding visor is open proceed as de scribed under Sliding visor Opening closing the glass sunroof and sliding visor together _ Press the switch twice in the de sired direction past the resist ance point The glass sunroof and sliding vi sor move together Pressing the switch again stops the motion Convenience operation refer to page 36 via the remote control or the door lock Comfort position In the comfort position the roof is not fully open This reduces wind noise in the passenger com partment Every time the glass sunroof is opened or closed completely it stops in the comfort position If desired continue the movement by pressing the switch Pinch protection system If the closing force when closing the glass sun roof exceeds a certain value the closing move ment is stopped beginning at approximately the middle of the opening in the roof or from the raised pos
263. r lamps in the instrument cluster go out To save battery power when the engine is off switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems power consumers Transmission position P with the ignition off When the ignition is switched off position P is engaged automatically When in an automatic car wash for example ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally lt A O m J O O When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system the ignition switches off auto matically Radio ready state This state can only be reached by pressing the Start Stop button briefly to switch off the engine while it is running Some electronic systems power consumers re main ready for operation Radio ready state switches off automatically gt After approx 8 minutes gt When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system Starting the engine General information Enclosed areas Do not let the engine run in enclosed areas otherwise breathing of exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas lt Unattended vehicle Do not leave the car unattended with the engine running otherwise it presents a poten tial source of danger Before leaving the car with the engine running set the parking brake and place the transmission in position P or neutral to prevent the car from m
264. r the vehicle can be damaged lt Vehicle with manual parking lock FN Manually release the transmission lock Manually release the transmission lock even if there is no malfunction involving the transmis sion Otherwise there is the danger that the transmission lock will be engaged automatically during towing lt Towing Observe the notes on towing Observe all notes on towing or vehicle damage or accidents can occur lt gt Make sure that the ignition is switched on otherwise the low beams tail lamps turn signals and windshield wipers may be un available gt Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle raised as the front wheels could turn gt When the engine is stopped there is no power assist Consequently more force needs to be applied when braking and steer ing gt Larger steering wheel movements are re quired gt Switch on the hazard warning system de pending on local regulations gt Ifthe electrical system has failed clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win dow Adhere to the towing speed and distance Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph 50 km h anda towing distance of 30 miles 50 km or damage to the transmission can occur lt Towing methods Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts otherwise damage may result Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the
265. re A DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AAABC Temperature ABC All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 g times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and cli mate Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfa ces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydro planing or peak traction characteristics Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions ona specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sus ta
266. removing the clips with a screw driver arrows At a glance Ly e Le p e O Driving tips NEEL OIA Communication Entertainment Mobility o oO o pes oO Tajemn o aa 4 Hook the release tool into the release point arrow 5 Forcefully pull the release tool up against the resistance until you notice a marked in crease in the resistance and the parking brake releases audibly Have the malfunction corrected If the parking brake has been released manually in response to a malfunction only technicians can return it to operation Have the malfunction corrected by your service center After a power failure Only put the parking brake into operation after a power failure The parking brake should only be put into oper ation again if it was manually released due to an interruption in the supply of electrical power Otherwise it cannot be ensured that the parking brake will function properly lt Putting the parking brake into operation 1 Switch on the ignition 2 Press the switch with the brake de pressed or transmission position P en gaged It may take several seconds for the brake to be put into operation Any sounds associated with this are normal The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation Indicator lamp in Canadian models Automatic Hold The concept This system assists the d
267. ress the button on the turn signal lever System limits Personal responsibility The high beam assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver s personal judgment of when to use the high beams Therefore man ually switch off the high beams in situations where this is required to avoid a safety risk lt The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following and driver intervention may be necessary gt In very unfavorable weather conditions such as fog or heavy precipitation gt In detecting poorly lit road users such as pedestrians cyclists horseback riders and wagons when driving close to train or ship traffic and at animal crossings Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 gt In tight curves on hilltops or in depressions in cross traffic or half obscured oncoming traffic on freeways gt Inpoorly lit towns and cities and in the pres ence of highly reflective signs gt At low speeds gt When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over dirty or cov ered with stickers etc Camera rearview mirror Keep the area in front of the interior rearview mirror clear Fog lamps Front fog lamps The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on 50 Press the button The green indicator lamp lights up If the automatic headlamp control refer to page 87 is activated the low beams will come on automatically when you swi
268. ring wheel is turned all the way gt Thevariable green pathway line assists you in assessing the amount of space actually needed to the side of the vehicle The pathway line is dependent on the cur rent steering angle and is continuously ad justed with the steering wheel movement 1 Select the symbol 2 Press the controller Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed eb S amp O m lt Controls Driving tips AE EL OID Communication Entertainment Y O D Soom 2 O aa Driving comfort Cameras The objectives of the Top View cameras are lo cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous ings The image quality may be impaired by dirt Clean the lens refer to page 253 Backup camera The concept The backup camera provides assistance in park ing and maneuvering backwards The area be hind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display System limits Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve hicle with your own eyes Otherwise an accident could result from road users or objects located outside the picture area of the backup cam era lt Detection of objects High protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the backup camera lt Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running The backup camera image is displayed if the system was switc
269. rison Entry of names and addresses the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically The entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle gt Only those letters are offered during the en try for which data is available gt Destination search town city names can be entered using the spelling of language avail able on the Control Display Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Voice activation system The concept gt The voice activation system can be used to operate equipment by means of spoken commands gt Thesystem encompasses special micro phones on the outer edge of the headliner gt Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands The system prompts you to make your entries gt 2 Verbal instructions in the Owner s Man ual to use with the voice activation system Requirements On the Control Display set the language to be used with the voice activation system to enable the system to identify the voice commands Set the language refer to page 81 Using voice activation Activating the voice activation system 1 i wheel Press the button on the steering 2 Say the command The command is displayed in the instrument cluster This symbol in the instrument cluster indi cates that the voice activation system is active If no further commands are available continue
270. river by automatically setting and releasing the parking brake such as when moving in stop and go traffic The vehicle is automatically held in place when it is stationary On inclines the system prevents the vehicle from rolling backward when driving away For your safety Automatic Hold is deactivated automatically and the parking brake is set when gt The engine is switched off gt A door is opened and the driver s safety belt is unbuckled gt The vehicle is braked to a standstill with the parking brake while driving 68 l Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 The indicator lamp switches from green to red and the letters AUTO H go out Indicator lamp in Canadian models Before driving away gt Release the parking brake manually gt Reactivate Automatic Hold Leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning engage position P of the automatic trans mission and ensure that the parking brake is set Otherwise the vehicle may begin to roll Activating wena Press the button The LED and the letters AUTO H light up The indicator lamp lights up AUTOH l l l row Automatic Hold is activated Deactivating ware Press the button again The LED and the letters AUTO H go out Automatic Hold is deactivated If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold press on the brake pedal to deactivate it When the parking brake
271. rmation TeleService supports communication with your service center gt Data on the vehicle s service requirements can be sent directly to the service center In this way the service center can plan its work in advance This shortens the duration of the service appointment gt Inthe event of a breakdown data on the ve hicle s condition can be sent directly to Roadside Assistance gt The service varies by country Connection costs may ensue gt Services may be restricted abroad Requirements gt BMW Assist is activated gt Wireless reception is available gt The engine is running Concierge service General information The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor mation on events gas stations or hotels and provides phone numbers and addresses Hotels can be booked directly by the BMW Assist Con cierge service The Concierge service is part of the optional Convenience Plan Starting the Concierge service 1 BMW Assist 217 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f 2 Concierge 1 BMW Assist v Concierge Messages Roadside Assistance BMW Search Customer Relations Service Request Service status 3 Start service A voice connection is established with the BMW Assist Concierge service Phone numbers and addresses can be transmitted to the vehicle Open the message via the message list refer to page 209 Roadside Assistance At a glance BMW Roadside As
272. rol malfunc tion 37 Remote control rear enter tainment 197 Remote control univer sal 134 Replacement fuse 245 Replacing parts 240 Replacing wheels tires 231 Reporting safety defects 8 Reserve warning refer to Range 77 Resetting Tire Pressure Mon itor TPM 93 Residual heat automatic cli mate control 130 Retaining straps securing cargo 149 Retreaded tires 231 Road avoiding 162 Road detour 162 Roadside Assistance 217 Roadside parking lamps 87 Roller sunblinds 45 Roll stabilization refer to Dy namic Drive 102 Roof load capacity 258 Roof mounted luggage rack 149 Rope for tow starting tow ing 250 Route 162 Route criteria route 162 Route displaying 162 Route section bypassing 163 RPM engine 257 RSC Runflat System Compo nent refer to Run flat tires 232 Rubber components care 252 Run flat tires 232 Run flat tires flat tire 93 96 S Safe braking 147 Safety 6 Safety belt reminder 54 Safety belts 53 Safety belts care 253 Safety switch windows 45 Safety systems airbags 90 Satellite radio 176 Saving fuel 150 Scale changing during navi gation 164 Screen refer to Control Dis play 19 Screw driver 240 Screw thread for tow fit ting 249 Search refer to BMW Search 218 Seat belts refer to Safety belts 53 Seat heating front 50 Seat heating rear 53 Seating position for chil dren 61 Seat mirror and steering wheel memory 57 Seats 48 Seats rea
273. rson detected in the extended area arrow 2 is moving from the right or left to the central area The symbols in the Head up Display corre spond to the symbols in the Control Display For people located in the central area the distance to the person is indicated by the size of the sym bol Although both the shape and the heat radiation are analyzed false warnings cannot be ruled out System limits Animals are not detected by the pedestrian de tection function even if they are clearly visible in the image System operation is limited in situations such as the following gt On steep hills in steep depressions or in tight curves gt When the camera is dirty or the protective glass is damaged In heavy fog rain or snowfall gt At very high external temperatures Pedestrian detection Limited pedestrian detection gt When people are fully or partially covered especially when their heads are covered gt When people are not in an upright position e g when lying down gt Cyclists on unconventional bicycles e g recumbent bicycles Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 gt After physical damage to the system e g after an accident Activation deactivation r Press the button A Display Heat image For safety reasons when driving at speeds above approx 3 mph 5 km h and in low ambient light the image is only displayed when the low beams are switch
274. rt no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Driving tips This chapter provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating modes Things to remember when driving Things to remember when driving Breaking in period General information Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to each other The following instructions will help achieve a long vehicle life and good economy Engine and differential Always obey the official speed limit Up to approx 1 200 miles 2 000 km Drive at varying engine and road speeds but do not exceed gt In gasoline engines 4 500 rpm or 100 mph 160 km h Avoid full throttle operation and use of the transmission s kickdown mode for the initial miles From 1 200 miles 2 000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture tires do not achieve their full trac tion potential until after an initial breaking in pe riod Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles 300 km Brake system Brakes require an initial break in period of ap prox 300 miles 500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and rotors Drive conservatively during this breaking in period Following part replacement The same breaking in procedures should be ob served if any of the components mentioned 146 above have to be renewed in the course of the vehi
275. s 2 Select the desired contact 3 Select the desired phone number The connection is established Editing a contact 1 My contacts 2 Select the desired contact 3 Edit contact amp F Contact Edit contact A MUSTERMANN MUNCHEN M NCHEN STA PETUELRING 130 DEUTSCHLAND 4 Change the entries 5 Move the controller to the left 6 Yes If a contact from the mobile phone is edited the changes are not stored on the mobile phone A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle and only this copy is displayed Under certain circum stances a contact entry with the same name is created Deleting contacts Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted The contacts on the mobile phone can not be deleted 1 My contacts 2 Highlight the contact Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 3 Open Options 4 Delete contact or Delete all contacts Exporting importing contacts Contacts can be exported and imported via the Personal Profile refer to page 33 At a glance 2 O km eal O O Driving tips Navigation Communication f Entertainment Mobility S G 3 Ge ad 215 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f BMW Assist BMW Assist BMW Assist General information BMW Assist provides you with various services for instance transmission of the
276. s Manual O HD Radio Reception O RDS The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use HD Radio reception Many stations broadcast both analog and digital signals License conditions HD Radio technology manufactured under li cense from iBiquity Digital Corp U S and For eign Patents HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq uity Digital Corp Activating deactivating digital radio reception 1 Radio 2 FM or AM 3 Open Options 4 HD Radio Reception The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use H This symbol is displayed in the status line when the audio signal is digital 175 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode the playback switches between analog and digital reception Due to time delayed broadcasting there may be repe titions or interruptions In this case switch off digital radio reception Displaying additional information Some stations broadcast additional information on the current track such as the name of the ar tist 1 Select the desired station 2 Open Options 3 Station info Selecting a substation Ol This symbol indicates that a main station also broadcasts additional substations The station name of the main station ends in HD1 Station names of the substations end in HD2 HD3 e
277. s detected M Rolling bars the detected vehicle has driven away Indicator warning lamps Personal responsibility The indicator and warning lamps do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her desired driving speed and style to the traffic conditions The vehicle symbol lights up in orange A vehicle has been detected ahead of you The vehicle symbol flashes orange The conditions are not adequate for op erating the system The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively assume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator acoustic signal sounds You are requested to intervene by brak ing or making an evasive maneuver The vehicle symbol flashes red and an 110 System limits Speed range Best results are achieved when using the sys tem on well developed roads and highways The desired speed can be selected between 20 mph 30 km h to 110 mph 180 km h The system can also be activated when station ary Comply with the legal speed limit in every situa tion when using the system Detection range The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited Two wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you for instance might not be detected Limited detection capacity Because of the limits to the detection ca pacity you should be alert at all times so that you can intervene actively if necessary otherwise there is the danger of
278. s displayed at the top edge of the screen 3 03 4 E Owner s Manual CD Multimedia Telephone Navigation BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings gt To display short information touch the but ton gt To display detailed information touch the button for an extended period At a glance A e ho a e Driving tips NEEL OIA Communication Entertainment Mobility S cc pes oO Tajm oO aa iDrive Deleting the button assignments 1 Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for approx five seconds 2 OK Entering letters and numbers 1 Turn the controller select letters or num bers 2 Select additional letters or numbers if needed 3 OK confirm the entry Symbol Function lt Press the controller delete the letter or number lt Press the controller for an extended period delete all letters or numbers LJ Enter a blank space Switching between letters and numbers Depending on the menu you can switch be tween entering letters and numbers Symbol Function ABc Enter the letters 1 Enter the numbers Switching between upper and lower case letters Depending on the menu you can switch be tween entering upper and lower case letters Symbol Function A abc Move the controller up switch from upper to lower case letters A ABC Move the controller up switch from lower to upper case letters 24 Entry compa
279. s open Closing the hood Let the hood drop from a height of approx 16 in 40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully The hood must audibly engage on both sides Hood open when driving If you see any signs that the hood is not completely closed while driving pull over imme diately and close it securely Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear otherwise injuries may result 235 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f S e2 40 J q Driving tips NEEL OIA Communication Entertainment Mobility Y 5 e5 pes oO Taje oO aa ine Ol Eng Engine oll Checking the oil level The concept The oil level is monitored electronically and dis played on the Control Display Requirements gt The engine must be running and warm after the vehicle has been driven for at least 6 miles 10 km gt The vehicle is stopped or being driven ona level roadway Displaying the oil level 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status 3 Engine oil level amp Vehicle status u S Engine oil level ee Possible messages gt Engine oil level OK gt Measurement not possible at this time Duration with the engine running ap prox 3 minutes Duration while driving approx 5 minutes gt Engine oil level below minimum Add 1 quart Add oil within the next 125 miles 200 km
280. s stored etting the time format Settings Time Date Format Ro NM a DH Select the desired format The time format is stored Date tting the date Settings Time Date Date Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed Pon gt pi Press the controller 6 Make the necessary settings for the month and year The date is stored Setting the 2 for 1 Settings 2 Time Date 3 Format 4 Select the desired format amp lt F Date format v dd mm yyyy mm dd yyyy The date format is stored Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Language Setting the language To set the language on the Control Display 1 Settings 2 Language Units Settings Info display Control display Time Date v Language Units Tone Speed Climate 3 Language 1 F Language Units Deutsch Default V100 km Language Speech mode Consumption Distance km Temperature pa 4 Select the desired language The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use y the voice dialoog To switch between a standard dialog and a short dialog 1 Settings 2 Language Units 3 Speech mode 4 Select the desired dialog ih p amp Speech mode 4 Default Short amp 5 2e c e O Units of measure he gt ga a fy Fa E gt B A Se T ng tne units or measure To set the units for fuel c
281. s with a tether strap Mounting points i O m J O O Depending on the vehicle equipment there are two outer or three mounting points for child re straint fixing systems with a tether strap Fold up the middle mounting point LATCH mounting eyes Only use the mounting eyes for the upper LATCH retaining strap to secure child restraint fixing systems otherwise the mounting eyes could be damaged lt Retaining strap guide Retaining strap Make sure the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes to the top anchor Otherwise the strap will not properly secure the child restraint fixing system in the event of an accident lt Tl 2 6 3 5 7 4 Direction of travel Head restraint Hook for upper retaining strap mh ON Mounting point eye 63 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Transporting children safely 5 Seat backrest 6 Upper retaining strap Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1 Raise the head restraint 2 Guide the upper retaining strap between the supports of the head restraint 3 Attach the hooks of the retaining strap to the mounting eyes 4 Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down 5 Lower the head restraint Locking the doors and windows Rear doors Push the locking lever on the rear doors down The door can now be opened from the outside only Safety switc
282. se child restraint fixing systems observe the information provided by the system manufacturer otherwise the pro tective effect can be impaired lt In the front passenger seat After installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat make sure that the front knee and side airbags on the front pas senger side are deactivated Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in the front passenger seat the front passenger airbags must be deactivated otherwise there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered even with a child restraint fixing system lt Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint fixing system move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the middle po sition to obtain the best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident Do not change the seat position and height after this Backrest width Before installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat open the backrest 61 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Ki O J O O Transporting children safely width refer to page 50 completely Do not change the backrest width again and do not call up amemory position Backrest width for the child seat Before installing a child restraint fixing system in the
283. se the brake pedal 3 Press onthe accelerator briefly or press the RES button or the rocker switch when the vehicle ahead of you drives away Displays in the instrument cluster a Ey r y a 4 i Display of desired speed a O m J O O Distance to vehicle ahead of you Vehicle symbol A WON Brief status display Desired speed Marking in the speedometer we a P gt The marking lights up in or rA ange the system has been f interrupted gt The marking lights up in green the system is active gt The marking does not light up the system is switched off Brief status display Selected desired speed 5 If appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages it is possible that the system requirements for operation are currently not met Distance to vehicle ahead of you The selected distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you is shown 109 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Driving comfort Distance display amp Distance 1 N N Distance 2 D NS ji gt Distance 3 D Db Distance 4 This value is set after the system is switched on iD N The system has been interrupted or distance control is deactivated be cause the accelerator is being pressed a vehicle was not detected gt a amp 5 Distance control is deactivated be cause the accelerator is being pressed a vehicle wa
284. shows 48 08 10 O amp the current position of the vehicle 11 34 36 N a _ Exit interactive map A Selecting the destination l4 View in northern direction 2 1 Select the symbol j y Display destination Display current location Interactive map is started T l l Find points of interest 2 Select the destination with crosshairs gt To change the scale turn the controller gt Select the symbol Start destination guidance to the location marked on the map Controls gt To shift the map move the controller in the required direction gt Exit interactive map gt To shift the map diagonally move the gt View in northern direction controller in the required direction and gt Display destination the map section turn it around the destination is displayed gt Display current location the map section around your current location is displayed Driving tips gt Find points of interest Destination entry by voice General information gt Instructions for voice activation system re Navigation 5 fer to page 25 z e S me i senile gt When entering the destination by voice you T menu items E can change between voice operation and c gt Select the symbol the iDrive S Start guidance or Add as another gt To have the available spoken instructions 2 c dest read aloud Voice commands Lu gt Exit interactive map return to the map
285. sistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a break down Starting Roadside Assistance Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist or TeleService 1 BMW Assist 2 Roadside Assistance The Roadside Assistance number is dis played If the mobile phone is paired a con nection is established to Roadside Assis tance 1 BMW Assist Concierge Messages Roadside Assistance BMW Search Customer Relations Service Request Service status At a glance A e pa a e Driving tips NEEL OIA Communication f Entertainment Mobility Reference BMW Assist Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or TeleService 1 BMW Assist 2 Roadside Assistance 3 Start service F Roadside Assistance Start service Service ready TeleService Diagnosis TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that are important for vehicle diagnosis These data are transmitted automatically After the data are transmitted the voice con nection to Roadside Assistance is re estab lished TeleService Help TeleService Help enables an in depth diagnosis of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via wire less transmission TeleService Help can be started after a prompt by Roadside Assistance and the termination of the voice connection Starting TeleService Help 1 Park the vehicle in a safe place 2 Set the parking brake 3 The engine
286. splayed on the Control Display 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status E Vehicle Info Quick reference Search by pictures Owner s Manual Onboard info Trip computer v Vehicle status 3 Service required Required maintenance procedures and le gally mandated inspections are displayed G Vehicle status 4 Select an entry to call up detailed informa tion Symbols No service is currently required The deadline for service or a le gally mandated inspection is approaching Please make a service appointment A The service deadline has al ready passed Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the required inspections Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set correctly 1 Vehicle Info 82 l Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 2 Vehicle status 3 Service required iS Vehicle status 2a ee 4 Vehicle inspection 5 Date 6 Create the settings 7 Confirm The entered date is stored Automatic Service Request Data regarding the maintenance status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto matically transmitted to your service center be fore a service due date You can check when your service center was notified 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status 3 Open Options 4 Last Service Request Check Control The concept The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of
287. ss cleaner Displays screens Use a microfiber cloth to clean the Control Dis play or the Head up Display Cleaning displays Do not use chemical or household cleans ers Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit Otherwise they could affect or damage surfa ces or electrical components Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials otherwise damage can result lt Long term vehicle storage Your service center can advise you on what to consider when storing the vehicle for longer than three months 253 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 gt ire Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Reference This chapter contains technical data short commands for the voice activation system and an index that will quickly take you to the information you need Technical data Technical data Dimensions Width with mirrors height with roof mounted aerial 61 6 inches 1564 mm Width without mirrors 74 8 inches 1901 mm 256 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Length wheel base At a glance O km eal O O 120 7 inches 3 070 mm 196 8 inches 4 999 mm Driving tips Smallest turning circle 40 ft 12 2 m Engine specifications The rated power outputs are established on the Navigation basis of fuel grade AKI 91 z O B i Displacement cu in
288. stance is set Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 The selected distance refer to page 109 is dis played in the instrument cluster Increase distance WAY Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set The selected distance refer to page 109 is dis played in the instrument cluster Calling up the desired speed and distance While driving Pore Press the button with the system RES switched on In the following cases the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again gt When the system is switched off gt When the ignition is switched off While standing Before leaving the vehicle Before leaving the vehicle with the engine running engage position P of the automatic transmission and apply the parking brake Oth erwise the vehicle may begin to roll lt gt The vehicle was braked to a halt by the sys tem When the marking in the speedometer is or ange The vehicle ahead of you drives away to ac celerate press on the accelerator briefly or press the RES button or the rocker switch The marking turns green again and your ve hicle follows the vehicle ahead of you Rolling bars in the distance indicator mean that the vehicle ahead of you has driven off gt You actively braked your vehicle to a halt by pressing on the brake pedal and it is stand ing behind another vehicle 1 RES Press the button to call up a stored desired speed 2 Relea
289. stent sound quality Approved mobile phones Inquire with your service center which mobile phones containing a Bluetooth interface are supported by the mobile phone preparation package Additional information can be found at www bmw com bluetooth These approved mobile phones with a certain software version support the vehicle functions described below Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones or software versions 204 Do not operate a mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad as this may lead to a malfunction Pairing unpairing the mobile phone Requirements gt The mobile phone is suitable gt The mobile phone is ready for operation gt Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle refer to page 205 and on the mobile phone gt Bluetooth presettings may need to be made on the mobile phone e g for a connection without confirmation or visibility refer to the mobile phone operating instructions gt A number with at least four and a maximum of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth pass key It is only required once for pairing gt The ignition is switched on Pairing and connecting Pairing the mobile phone To avoid becoming distracted and posing an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi cle s occupants and to other road users only pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is sta tionary lt Pair the vehicle entirely on the front or rear Con trol Display 1 T
290. struc tions 163 Antifreeze washer fluid 72 Antilock Brake System ABS 101 Anti slip control refer to DSC 101 Approved engine oils 236 Armrest refer to Center arm rest 141 Ashtray 136 Assist 216 Assistance Roadside Assis tance 247 Assistance when driving off 106 Audio playback 181 AUTO intensity 129 Automatic car wash 251 Automatic climate con trol 128 Automatic Cruise Control with Stop amp Go 107 Automatic Curb Monitor 59 Automatic deactivation front passenger airbags 91 Automatic headlamp con trol 87 Automatic Hold 68 Automatic locking 38 Automatic recirculated air control 129 Automatic Soft Closing doors 38 Automatic Soft Closing tail gate 39 Automatic transmission with Steptronic 72 Automatic trunk lid 39 AUTO program automatic cli mate control 129 AUTO program intensity 129 AUX IN port 192 Axle loads weights 258 Backrest curvature refer to Lumbar support 50 Backrest seats 48 Backrest width 50 Back seats adjusting 51 Backup camera 120 Backup lamps bulb replace ment 243 Balance 172 Band aids refer to First aid kit 247 Bar for tow starting tow Ing 249 Basic position rear seats 53 Bass 172 Battery replacement remote control rear entertain ment 197 Battery replacement vehicle battery 244 Battery replacement vehicle remote control 32 Battery vehicle 244 Before entering the car wash 251 Belts safety belts 53 Online Edition for P
291. symbol A Select the desired category e g Genre or Artist All entries are displayed in a list gt Open A Z search and input the de sired entry When a letter is entered the results are filtered using this letter as the first letter If multiple letters are entered all results that contain that sequence are displayed gt Select the desired entry from the list GF U5B audio JUKEBOX audio JUKEBOX Browse directory Genre All genres All artists All composers All albums All tracks Start play 5 Select other categories if you wish Not all categories need to be selected For example if all of the tracks by a certain artist are to be displayed call up that artist only All of the tracks by that artist are then dis played 6 Start play Restarting a track search New search 194 f Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Playback lists gt Do not connect devices such as fans or Calling up playback lists lamps to the USB audio interface 1 CD Multimedia gt Do not connect USB hard drives Do not use the audio interface to recharge 2 External devices l external devices 3 Select the symbol 4 Playlists Current playback List of tracks currently being played CD Multimedia External devices e Select the symbol Current playback oe YS Random playback The current list of tracks is played back in ran dom order 1 CD Mul
292. t Thigh support OORA amp WN 49 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 5 Thigh support Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture gt Press the front rear section of the switch The curvature is increased decreased gt Press the upper lower section of the switch The curvature is shifted up down Backrest width Change the width of the backrest using the side wings to adjust the lateral support To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle the backrest width temporarily opens fully 50 Shoulder support Also supports the back in the shoulder area gt Results in a relaxed seating position gt Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles Active seat Active adjustment of the seat cushion s con tours reduces muscular tension and fatigue to help prevent lower back pain A gt Press the button The LED lights up Seat heating Sam Press the button once for each temper ature level Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit Press the button longer The LEDs go out The heating action in the seat cushion and back rest can be distributed in different ways 1 Climate 2 Seat heating distribution
293. t colored leather more frequently as dust and dirt are more noticeable 252 Use leather care products otherwise dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface Suitable care products are available from the service center Upholstery material care Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner If they are very dirty e g beverage stains use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions Avoid rubbing the ma terial vigorously Damage from Velcro fasteners Open Velcro fasteners on pants or other articles of clothing can damage the seat covers Ensure that any Velcro fasteners are closed Caring for special components Light alloy wheels Use wheel cleaner particularly during the winter months Do not use aggressive acidic strongly alkaline or abrasive cleaners or steam jets above 140 F 60 C follow the manufacturer s instructions Chrome surfaces Carefully clean components such as the radiator grille or door handles with an ample supply of water possibly with shampoo added particu larly when they have been exposed to road salt Rubber components Aside from water treat only with rubber cleans ers When cleaning rubber seals do not use any sil icon containing car care products in order to avoid damage or reduced noise damping Fine wood parts Clean fine wo
294. t destination Ata different destination Along route Special destinations category 1 Category 2 Select All or the specific category of the special destination e g hotels or restau rants Category details For some special destinations additional details can be displayed that are available in the navi gation data e g an Italian style restaurant Category details At a glance Controls Q Ez D Fs m Entertainment Navigation Communication Mobility eb S G Ge 0 ad Navigation Qs Points of Interest At current location HOTEL Category details Multiple a k Start search Name A Z search Starting the search for special destinations 1 Start search Alist of the special destinations is displayed gt At current location The special destinations are listed ac cording to their distance from the cur rent location and are displayed with a di rectional arrow pointing to the destination gt At destination At a different destination and Along route Special destinations are sorted by the distance to the search point gt Destinations of the selected category are displayed in the map view as sym bols The display depends on the scale of the map and the category 2 Highlight the special destination With the Professional navigation system A preview map Is displayed on the split screen 3 Select
295. t hand drive vehicles some controls are arranged differently than shown in the illustra tions Status at publication The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol icy of constant development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards In rare cases therefore the features described in this Owner s Manual may differ from those in your vehicle For your own safety Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology e g the use of modern materials and high performance electronics re quires suitable maintenance and repair meth ods Therefore have this work performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works accord ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri ately trained personnel Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 If this work is not carried out properly there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards Parts and accessories BMW recommends using parts and accessories approved by BMW for this purpose Your BMW center is the right contact for genu ine BMW parts and accessories other products approved by BMW and related qualified advice BMW has tested these products for safety and suitability in relation to BMW vehicles BMW can assume responsibility for them How ever we cannot assume any responsibility whatsoever for parts and accessories that have not been specifically approved by BMW BMW cannot e
296. tact Add position to contact EY Receive Traffic Info Sonderziele Karte Gespeicherte Reisen Routenverlauf 3 Selecta contact in the list or if desired with A Z search 4 Depending on the selection choose an ex 4 fnecessary select Business address or isting contact from the list Select the type Home address of address and enter the first and last name f 5 Store in vehicle storing the desi After entering the destination store the desti Navigation 1 nation in the address book 2 Address book Open Options 3 Highlight the entry 2 Store as new contact or Add to existing 4 Open Options contact n 5 Edit in Contacts or Delete entry c Optionen i Control Display ausschalten SAna Sian Adressbuch SE TELAK Betriebsanleitung anzeigen The home address must be stored Specify the Navigation home address refer to page 213 Als Kontakt speichern 1 Navigation Zu Kontakt hinzuf gen i 7 FY Verkehrsinfos empfangen 2 Address book 3 Home 3 Select an existing contact if available G Address book 4 Select Business address or Home TA address Check My contacts address a Home 5 Enter Last name and if necessary First n Andreas name Angela Hans Juergen Marcus 6 Store in vehicle J J de T vy a D The current position can be stored in the ad n dress book 4 Start destination guidance 1 Navigation
297. tart service 1 amp Service Request Start service Service ready Automatic Service Request The TeleService data necessary for servicing the vehicle are automatically sent to your service partner prior to the service deadline If possible the service partner will contact you and a service appointment can be arranged To check when your service partner was noti fied 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status i a 6 Vehicle Info i Quick reference i Search by pictures Owner s Manual Onboard info Trip computer Vehicle status i 3 Open Options 4 Last Service Request amp Options i Switch off control display Flat Tire Monitor Display Owner s Manual Reset Vehicle Info Last Service Request Data transfer The status of the data transfer is displayed 1 BMW Assist 2 Open Options 3 Data transfer Services status Displaying available services Display of all services available in the vehicle 1 BMW Assist 2 Service status 3 Available services Activating BMW Assist If the services included in a Assist subscription are not displayed they may need to be activated Activate BMW Assist Activating TeleService TeleService may need to be activated in the ve hicle Activate TeleService Deactivating TeleService Even if the services of TeleService have been deactivated a voice connection to Roadside As sistance is still possible
298. tatus of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display e g whether or not the FTM is active 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 3 Flat Tire Monitor Display Vehicle status g Flat Tire Monitor 1 Flat Tire Monitor active The status is displayed gt Lines arrow 1 the system is activated O padi c e gt Arrows arrow 2 at least one lane line was detected and warnings can be issued Lane departure warning Issued warning me EAN p If you leave the lane and if a lane line has been This system issues a warning at speeds above detected the steering wheel begins vibrating approx 40 mph 65 km h if the vehicle is about i If the turn signal is set before changing the lane to leave the lane on roads with lane lines g ging a warning is not issued The steering wheel begins vibrating gently The system does not provide a warning if the nd of warnini turn signal is set before leaving the lane The warning ends gt Automatically after approx 3 seconds Switching on off gt When returning to your own lane gt When braking hard gt When using the turn signal System limits Personal responsibility The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver s personal judgment of the course of the road and the traffic situation Seg Press the button In the event of awarning do notjerk the steeri
299. tc 1 Select the desired station 2 Press the controller 3 Select the substation When reception is poor the substation is muted for several seconds If reception is interrupted for an extended period it switches back to the main station Weather Band General information The availability of the Weather Band and the number of available channels can vary depend ing on the region Switching on the Weather Band 1 Radio 2 Weather band 3 Select the desired channel Additional information Weather Band is a service of the National Oce anic and Atmospheric Administration NOAA Navigation co S S e2 J x Driving tips Communication Entertainment v 3 Som O a Radio Additional information on the Internet www nws noaa gov Satellite radio General information The channels are offered in predefined pack ages The packages must be enabled by tele phone Navigation bar overview K lt 3 lt p Change thelist view Ko Select the category ce Direct channel entry O Timeshift x y Open the My Favorites category open a favorite ir Manage the favorites A Traffic Jump The functions of the navigation bar symbols can also be stored on the programmable memory buttons refer to page 23 Managing a subscription To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the channels you must have reception It is usually at its best when you
300. tch on the front fog lamps Cornering lamp Inthe 20 switch position a cornering lamp is switched on for a broader light distribution at speeds up to 68 mph 110 km h 89 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 i Instrument lighting Adjusting ao The parking lamps or low beams s must be switched on to adjust the brightness Adjust the brightness using the thumb wheel Interior lamps General information The interior lamps footwell lamps entry lamps and courtesy lamps are controlled automati cally The brightness of some of these lamps is influ enced by the thumb wheel for the instrument lighting 1 Interior lamps 2 Reading lamp Switching the interior lamps on and off Press the button To switch off permanently press the button for approx 3 seconds To clear this setting press the button Reading lamps Press the button Reading lamps are located at the front and rear next to the interior lamps At a glance Navigation Y O D L O Z Controls 2 Q _ e2 2 m Entertainment Communication 1 Front airbag driver 4 Side airbag 2 Front airbag front passenger 5 Knee airbags 3 Head airbags Front airbags Protective action Front airbags help protect the driver and front Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa passenger by responding to frontal impacts in tion e g in less severe accidents or rear end which safet
301. te Gracenote is the industry standard in music rec ognition technology and related content deliv ery For more information please visit www gracenote com CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 2000 2010 Gracenote Gracenote Software copyright 2000 2010 Gracenote This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 773 6 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593 and other patents issued or pend ing Some services supplied under license from Open Globe Inc for U S Patent 6 304 523 Storing from a CD DVD 1 Insert a CD or DVD into the CD DVD player CD Multimedia CD DVD Select the symbol for the CD DVD player Store in vehicle aoe o w GF Audio CD Unknown artist amp Unknown album 00 28 FA Store in vehicle Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 The music collection is displayed and the first track of the CD DVD is played back During the storage process the tracks are played in se quence Observe the following during the storage proc ess Do not switch to the CD DVD player and do not remove the CD DVD from the CD DVD player as this will interrupt the storage process You can switch to the other audio sources without inter rupting the storage process Tracks from the current CD DVD that have already been stored can be called up Interrupting storage 1 CD Multimedia 2 CD DVD 3 Storing
302. te arrow 2 Pressing again stops the motion The closing process is not interrupted when the vehicle starts moving Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the tail gate is clear otherwise injuries may result lt Manual operation In the event of an electrical malfunction operate the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow and smooth motion Locking separately The tailgate can be locked separately using the switch in the front center armrest gt The tailgate is locked ar row 1 a 3S b M A The small and large tailgates are locked gt The tailgate is unlocked ar row 2 Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position This secures the tailgate and disconnects it from the central locking system When the center armrest is locked the tailgate cannot be accessed This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked using valet service The infra red remote control can be handed out without the key i O m J O O Emergency unlocking Pull the handle inside the trunk The tailgate is unlocked Comfort Access The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activating the remote control All you need to do is to have the remote control with you e g in your jacket pocket The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is nearby or in the passenger compartment Comfort Access supports the following func tions gt Unlocking locking of the ve
303. ted side airbags gt Donothang pieces of clothing such as jack ets over the backrests gt Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not rest against the head airbag otherwise injuries can occur if the airbags are triggered Do not remove the airbag restraint system gt Do not remove the steering wheel gt Do not apply adhesive materials to the air bag cover panels cover them or modify them in any way gt Never modify either the individual compo nents or the wiring in the airbag system This also applies to steering wheel covers the dashboard the seats the roof pillars and the sides of the headliner Even when all instructions are followed closely injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short term and in most cases temporary hear ing impairment in sensitive individuals In the case of a malfunction deactivation and after triggering of the airbags Do not touch the individual components imme diately after the system has been triggered oth erwise there is the danger of burns Only have the airbags checked repaired or dis mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by your service center or a workshop that has the necessary authorization for handling explosives Non professional attempts to service the sys tem could lead to failure in an emergency or un desired triggering of
304. ter the vehicle is switched off for only approx 4 seconds Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Functions such as seat heating and the rear win dow defroster require a lot of energy and con sume additional fuel especially in city and stop and go traffic Therefore switch off these functions if they are not actually needed Have maintenance carried out Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle economy and operating life Have the maintenance carried out by your serv ice center Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys tem refer to page 238 151 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 152 ine Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Navigation Navigation Navigation system General information The navigation system can determine the pre cise position of the vehicle with the aid of sat ellites and vehicle sensors and can reliably guide you to every entered destination Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be updated Entries in stationary vehicle Enter data only when the vehicle is sta tionary and always give priority to the applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradic tion between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system Failure to take to this precaution can place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in danger D
305. the airbag either of which could result in injury lt Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags The system determines whether the front pas senger seat is occupied by measuring the re sistance of the human body The front knee and side airbag on the front passenger side are activated or deactivated ac cordingly Leave feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the footwell otherwise the front passenger airbags may not function properly Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat Before transporting a child on the front passen ger seat see the safety notes and instructions under Children on the front passenger seat lt Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults the front passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain sitting positions In this case the indica tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up In this case change the sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out If it is not possible to activate the airbags have the person sit in the rear To make sure that the occupied seat cushion can be evaluated correctly gt Do not attach covers cushions ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat un less they are specifically recommended b
306. the button on the steering wheel 2 Say the command Terminating the voice activation system r Briefly press the button on the steering o wheel or gt Cancek Possible commands Having possible commands read aloud Press the button Help Possible commands are announced The digits from zero to nine are recognized The digits can be spoken separately or combined in a sequence to accelerate the entry Using alternative commands In many cases the system is able to recognize several commands to execute the same func tion such as the following Dial namex or Namex Example dialing a phone number f Gs Briefly press the button on the steering wheel 2 Dial number The system says Please say the number Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 3 E g 123 456 790 The system says 123 456 790 Continue 4 Dial number The system says Dialing number Calling Dialing a phone number 1 Dial number 2 Say the phone number 3 Diak Correcting the phone number The sequence of digits can be deleted after the system has repeated the digits Correct number The command can be repeated as often as nec esSary Deleting a phone number Deletex All digits entered up to that point are deleted Redialing Rediak Voice phone book Depending on how your vehicle is equipped it may be necessary to create your own voice phone book The e
307. the front of the vehicle Brightness With the Side View switched on 1 Select the symbol 2 Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller Contrast With the Side View switched on 1 Select the symbol 2 Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller Cameras i AT A The two camera lenses are located on the sides of the bumper The image quality may be impaired by dirt Clean the lens refer to page 253 Night Vision with pedestrian detection The concept Night Vision with pedestrian detection is a night vision system An infrared camera records the area in front of the vehicle and displays the image on the Con trol Display The picture is a heat image The system has an integrated pedestrian detection function that detects pedestrians and cyclists Warm objects that are similar in shape to human beings are detected by the system Personal responsibility Night Vision cannot replace the driver s personal judgment of the visibility conditions and the traffic situation The view ahead and the actual visibility conditions must always be the basis on which the vehicle speed is adjusted otherwise there is a risk to road safety Heat image The image shows the heat radiated by objects in the field of view of the camera Warm objects have a light appearance and cold objects a dark appearance The ability to detect a
308. the interior mirror 211 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Telephone Environmental conditions Inserting the mobile phone gt Say the commands numbers and letters I smoothly and with normal volume empha sis and speed gt Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system gt Keep the doors and windows closed to pre vent noise interference gt Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking 1 Depending on the mobile phone remove the protective cap from the antenna con nector of the mobile phone 2 Slide the mobile phone with the buttons fac Installation position ing up in the direction of the electrical con nections arrow 1 and push downward ar row 2 until it engages Snap in adapter In the center armrest Inserting the snap in adapter 1 Press the button and remove the cover Removing the mobile phone 2 Insert the snap in adapter at the front ar row 1 and press down arrow 2 until it en gages Press the button and remove the mobile phone 212 i Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Contacts General information Contacts can be created and edited The con tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as well if this function is supported by the mobile phone The addresses can be adopted as des tinations for navigation and the phone numbers can be dialed directly New contact 1 Contacts
309. the remote control for approx 1 second P The small tailgate opens slightly gt ae With automatic trunk lid operation Press the button on the remote control for approx 1 second and release The large tailgate opens automatically Note the opening height of the large tail gate The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when the large tailgate opens otherwise damage may result lt After the tailgate is closed it is locked and moni tored again by the alarm system The hazard warning system flashes once Panic mode gt Press the button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds Switching off the alarm gt Unlock the vehicle using the remote control gt Unlock the vehicle via the driver s door lock using the key gt With Comfort Access If you are carrying the remote control with you pull on the door handle Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror i O J O O gt The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds The system is armed gt The indicator lamp flashes after locking The doors hood or tailgate is not closed properly but the rest of the vehicle is se cured After 10 seconds the indicator lamp flashes continuously The interior motion sensor is not active gt The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking The vehicle has not been tampered with gt The indicator lamp flashes after unlock
310. the ve hicle It is advised that you do not use mobile commu nication devices e g mobile phones inside the vehicle without connecting them directly to the external antenna Otherwise the vehicle elec tronics and mobile communication devices can interfere with each other In addition there is no assurance that the radiation generated during transmission will be discharged from the vehicle interior lt Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan ing It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle yn Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads reduce your speed to prevent hydroplaning lt Driving through water Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper than 9 8 inches 25 cm and at this height no faster than walking speed up to 6 mph 10 km h Adhere to water depth and speed limita tions Do not exceed this water depth and walking speed otherwise the vehicle s engine the elec trical systems and the transmission may be damaged lt Braking safely Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard feature Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations when this is neces Sary The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness You can still avo
311. timedia 2 External devices 3 Open Options 4 Random Fast forward reverse Press and hold the button for the cor responding direction lI gt c e3 4 J Eel e3 c LL Notes Do not expose the audio device to extreme en vironmental conditions such as very high tem peratures refer to the audio device operating instructions Depending on the configuration of the audio files e g bit rates greater than 256 kbit s the files may not play back correctly in each case Information on connection gt Theconnected audio device is supplied with a max power of 500 mA if supported by the device Therefore do not connect the de vice to the power socket in the vehicle gt Donotuse force when plugging the con nector into the USB interface 195 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Rear entertainment Rear entertainment Controls f 7 hm M 1 Screen left 2 Screen right 3 Center armrest remote control 4 CD DVD player Rear CD DVD player vo 3 L Se R 5 vo 7 CD DVD slot Eject CD DVD On off right Headphone connection right RCA sockets Headphone connection left On off left NO oO fh WN Switching the system on off Press the left or right side of the button on the CD DVD player in the rear for the respective page 196 Rear entertainment and screens are switched on off After sw
312. to help you Even if you are unable to respond the BMW Assist Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circumstan ces For this purpose data that are used to de termine the necessary rescue measures such as the current position of the vehicle if it can be established are transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist Response Center cannot be heard on the hands free system the hands free system Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 may be malfunctioning However the BMW Assist Response Center may still be able to hear you Initiating an Emergency Request automatically Under certain conditions an Emergency Re quest is automatically initiated immediately after a severe accident Automatic Collision Notifica tion is not affected by pressing the button Warning triangle The warning triangle is located on the left in the trunk Release the Velcro fastener to remove it First aid kit The first aid kit is located in a storage compart ment on the right side in the trunk Fold up the cover to remove it Some of the articles have a limited service life Check the expiration dates of the contents reg ularly and replace any items promptly Roadside Assistance Service availability Roadside Assistance from the BMW Group pro vides around the clock assistance in the event of a breakdown including on weekends and ho
313. ts lt Continued driving with a flat tire Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure gt With alight load 1 to 2 people without lug gage approx 90 miles 150 km gt With a medium load 2 people trunk full or 4 people without luggage approx 50 miles 80 km gt With a full load 4 people trunk full approx 30 miles 50 km Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics e g re duced lane stability during braking a longer braking distance and altered self steering prop erties Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of the tire Reduce speed and stop otherwise pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident Do not con tinue driving and contact your service center lt Message when not reset The yellow warning lamp lights up A message appears on the Control Dis play The system was not reset e g after a wheel change Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system Status display The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM can be displayed on the Control Display e g whether or not the TPM is active 94 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status 3 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM amp Vehicle status TPM active The status is d
314. ull the switch past the resistance point again within approx 4 seconds and hold it there The window closes without pinch protec tion Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Safety switch The following functions can be locked simulta neously using the switch gt Opening and closing of the rear windows using the switches in the rear gt Operation of the roller sunblinds using the switches in the rear gt Adjustment of the power rear seats Adjustment of the power head restraints in the rear Switching on and off Press the button The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on Safety switch for rear operation Press the safety switch when transporting children in the rear otherwise injury may result if the windows are closed without supervision To deactivate the function the vehicle must be in at least the radio ready state Roller sunblinds General information The safety switch in the driver s door can be used to prevent children for example from op erating the roller blinds using the switches in the rear Press the safety switch in the driver s door The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on If you are no longer able to move the roller blinds after having activated them consecutively a number of times the system is blocked for a limited time to prevent overheating Let the sys tem cool The roller sunblinds cannot be moved at low
315. ums listed in order of their storage dates Audio CD Music data import export O Compressed audio files 190 l Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Managing music Albums Renaming an album The name of the album if available is automat ically entered when the album is stored If the name is unknown it can be changed later if needed 1 CD Multimedia 2 Music collection 3 Highlight the desired album 4 Open Options 5 Rename album Options Audio CD 1 Rename album Delete album Music collection Display Owner s Manual Free memory Delete music collection 6 Select the letters individually Deleting an album An album cannot be deleted while a track from that album is being played 1 CD Multimedia 2 Music collection 3 Highlight the desired album 4 Open Options 5 Delete aloum Deleting a track and directory A track cannot be deleted while it is being played A directory cannot be deleted while a track from that directory is being played 1 CD Multimedia 2 Music collection 3 Highlight the directory or track 191 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 f 4 Open Options 5 Delete folder or Delete track Free memory capacity Display the free memory capacity in the music collection 1 CD Multimedia 2 Music collection 3 Open Options 4 Free memory Music collection Backing up the music c
316. up continuously con tinue the programming procedure be ginning with step 4 Locate the button on the receiver of the de vice to be set e g on the drive Reassigning individual programs 1 2 Switch on the ignition Hold the hand held transmitter at a distance of approx 2 to 8in 5 to 20 cm from the mem ory buttons Press the memory button of the universal remote control If the LED flashes slowly after approx 20 seconds press the transmit button on the hand held transmitter Release both buttons when the LED flashes rapidly Ifthe LED does not flash rapidly after approx 15 seconds change the distance and repeat the step Deleting all stored programs Press the left and right memory buttons for ap prox 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly All stored programs are deleted The programs cannot be deleted individually 135 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Ei O J O O t ior equipmen Inter Ashtray cigarette lighter Rear Front Opening Opening Press on the cover Press on the cover Emptying Take out the insert Emptying Connecting electrical devices Sockets The lighter socket can be used for electrical de vices up to approx 200 watts with 12 volts with the engine running or the ignition switched on Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors Take out the insert Front center console Lighter Push in
317. ur at once the messages are displayed consecutively These messages can be hidden for approx 8 seconds After this time they are dis played again automatically gt Other Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx 20 seconds They are stored and can be displayed again later Displaying stored Check Control messages 1 Vehicle Info 2 Vehicle status 3 Check Control i Vehicle status 4 Select the text message Messages after trip completion Malfunctions indicated during a trip are dis played again after the ignition is switched off Speed limit detection The concept Speed limit detection shows the current maxi mum allowable speed in the instrument cluster The camera at the base of the interior rearview mirror monitors traffic signs at the edge of the road and uses the information from the naviga tion system In this way the allowable speed is displayed even in the absence of traffic signs such as within town limits FN Personal judgment The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver s personal judgment of the traffic situa tion Speed limit detection assists the driver and does not replace the human eye Switching on off 1 Settings 2 Info display 3 Speed limit information i Info display LY Additional indicators EY Range LY Distance to destination GY Arrival time EY Average consumption LY Average speed EY Speed limit information
318. uspension components brake dust shields telephones including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna or trans ceiver equipment for instance CBs walkie talkies ham radios or similar accessories may cause extensive damage to the vehicle com promise its safety interfere with the vehicle s electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty See your BMW center for additional information Maintenance re placement or repair of the emission control de vices and systems may be performed by any au tomotive repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part California Proposition 65 Warning California laws require us to state the following warning Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle con tain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cal ifornia to cause cancer and birth defects and re productive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash your hands after handling Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals Always protect your skin by washi
319. utomatically after a certain period of time All program Press the button ALL The current settings on the driver s side for temperature air volume air distribution and AUTO program are transferred to the front pas senger side and to the left and right rear The program is switched off if the settings on the front passenger side and in the rear are changed Residual heat The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the interior 130 Functional requirement gt Upto 20 minutes after the engine has been switched off Warm engine The battery is sufficiently charged External temperature below 77 F 25 C Switching on 1 Switch off the ignition 2 Press the right side of the button on the driver s side tif is shown on the display of the automatic cli mate control The interior temperature air volume and air dis tribution can be adjusted with the ignition switched on Switching off At the lowest fan speed press the left side of the button on the driver s side iif on the display of the automatic climate control goes out Switching the system on off Switching off gt Complete system Mey At the lowest fan speed press the left side of the button on the driver s side gt On the front passenger side Maes At the lowest fan speed press the left side of the button on the front passenger side Switching on Press any button Microfilter activated charcoal filte
320. valuate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety hazard This guarantee is also not applicable when country specific government approval has been granted Testing of this kind may fail to embrace the entire range of potential operat ing conditions to which components might be exposed on BMW vehicles Such products could conceivably fail to comply with BMW s own stringent quality standards Parts and Accessories For your own safety use genuine parts and ac cessories approved by BMW When you pur chase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts you simultane ously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle BMW warrants these parts to be free from de fects in material and workmanship BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from in stallation of parts and accessories not approved by BMW BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle its operation or its occupants Genuine BMW Parts BMW Accessories and other prod ucts approved by BMW together with profes sional advice on using these items are available from all BMW centers Installation and operation of non BMW approved accessories such as alarms radios amplifiers radar detectors wheels s
321. view Saying the entries 5 gt Find points of interest the search for gt Example to enter a town city in Germany as 2 special destinations is started a whole word the language of the system z must be German z m a e Specifying the street gt The town city street and house number O If the system cannot recognize a street it dis can be said as a single sentence plays a street name in the vicinity or the coordi gt Countries towns and cities streets and in nates of the destination tersections can be said as whole words or spelled in the language of the system refer 2 Interactive map to page 81 In the interactive map the scale canbe adjusted gt Spell the entry if the spoken language and and the visible map section can be shifted In the language of the system differ addition pressing the controller makes further gt Say the letters smoothly and avoid exag functions available y y g gerating the pronunciation and inserting lengthy pauses between the letters oO 5 oO re oO aa 159 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 i Navigation Entering the address 1 Briefly press the button on the steering wheel 2 Enter address 3 Wait for a request from the system 4 Specify the desired address in the sug gested form 5 Continue making the entry as prompted by the system 6 Ifnecessary individually name the separate components of the address e g the
322. wo different driver s seat exterior mirror and steering wheel positions can be stored and re trieved for each remote control The adjustment of the lumbar support is not stored e Sen Two different seat positions can be stored and retrieved Storing 1 Switch on the ignition 2 Set the desired position cs Press the button on the door The LED in the button lights up 4 Press the desired button 1 or 2 The LED goes out If the M button is pressed accidentally Press the button on the door again The LED goes out Calling up settings Do not retrieve the memory while driving Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving as an unexpected movement of the seat or steering wheel could result in an accident lt 1 Open the driver s door 2 Switch off the ignition 3 Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2 The corresponding seat position is performed automatically The procedure stops when a switch for adjust ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed 1 Close the driver s door or switch on the ig nition Ti Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Adjusting 2 Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until the adjustment procedure is completed Calling up of a seat position deactivated After a brief period the calling up of stored seat positions is deactivated to save battery power To reactivate calling up of a seat position gt Open or close the door
323. y the manufacturer of your vehicle gt Donot place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below 91 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 Ki O J O O Safety Indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags The indicator lamp for the front passenger air bags indicates the operating state of the front passenger airbags The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac tivated or deactivated gt The indicator lamp lights up when a child who is properly seated in a child restraint fix ing system intended for that purpose is detected on the seat or the seat is empty The airbags on the front passen ger side are not activated gt The indicator lamp does not light up when for example a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat The airbags on the front passenger side are ac tivated Most child seats are detected by the system especially the child seats required by the NHTSA at the time the vehicle was manufac tured After installing achild seat make sure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger air bags lights up This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front passenger air bags are not activated Strength of the driver s and front passenger airbag The strength with which the driver s and front passenger airbags are triggered depends on the position of the driver s and front passenger seats
324. y belts alone cannot provide ade collisions uate restraint q Information on how to ensure the optimal protective effect of the airbags Side airbags In a lateral impact the side airbag supports the BEEP at atistance ron the airbags body on the side in the chest area gt Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim holding your hands at Head airbags the 3 o clock and 9 o clock positions to keep the danger of injury to your hands or arms as Li heh h ible i irbag is tri In a lateral impact the head airbag supports the low as possible if the airbag is triggered head gt There should be no people animals or ob Knee airbag jects between an airbag and a person The knee airbag protects the legs during afron gt Do not use the cover of the front airbag on tal collision the front passenger side as a storage area 90 l Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 gt Keep the dashboard and window on the front passenger side clear i e do not cover with adhesive labels or coverings and do not attach holders such as for navigation instru ments and mobile phones gt Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly i e keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell otherwise leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered gt Do not place slip covers seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integra
325. y visibility The visibility of the displays in the Head up Dis play is influenced by gt Certain sitting positions gt Objects on the cover of the Head up Dis play gt Sunglasses with certain polarization filters gt Wet roads gt Unfavorable light conditions If the image is distorted check the basic set tings Switching on off a Press the button Display 4 35 BAYSHORIE BOULEVARD 2 A 800 ft yA l 30 mph 5 i i ded Lane departure warning Active Cruise Control Desired speed Navigation system a fF Q N Speed The collision warning or Check Control mes sages are displayed briefly if needed Selecting displays in the Head up Display 1 Settings 2 Head up display 3 Displayed information 126 f Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 4 Select the desired displays in the Head up A film in the windshield prevents double images Display from being displayed Therefore have the special windshield replaced by a service center only Lert amp Display At a glance O Speed limit information O Driver assistance O Navigation O Check Control Controls The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient light Q Ez D a d m The basic setting can be adjusted manually Settings Head up display
326. ystem gt Arrow view of navigation system When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system Adjusting the info display You can select what information from the com puter is to be displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster 1 Settings 2 Info display 3 Select the desired displays amp F Infodisplay EY Range consumption EY Range EY Distance to destination BY Arrival time EY Average consumption LY Average speed EY Date Speed limit Display of a speed limit which when reached should cause a warning to be issued Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops be low the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph 5 km h Displaying setting or changing the limit 1 Settings 2 Speed 78 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 604 413 03 10 500 3 Warning at Warning at 6 km h O Warning Select current speed 4 Turn the controller until the desired limit is displayed 5 Press the controller The speed limit is stored tivating deactivating the limit Settings Speed Warning a i Press the controller Settings Speed Select current speed RwWN gt Press the controller The current vehicle speed is stored as the limit Resetting values The average fuel consumption and average speed can be reset Press and hold the computer button on the turn signal lever Trip computer There are two types of computer gt

BMW 550i Owner's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents